Lens driving apparatus, and camera module and optical device comprising same

ABSTRACT

One embodiment comprises: a substrate; a housing comprising a first side part and second side part facing each other and a third side part and fourth side part facing each other; a bobbin arranged inside the housing; a first coil arranged on the bobbin; and a magnet arranged in the housing, wherein the substrate comprises a second coil facing the magnet, the magnet comprises a first magnet arranged on the first side part of the housing, a second magnet arranged on the second side part of the housing, and a third magnet arranged on the third side part of the housing, the second coil comprises a first coil unit facing the first magnet, a second coil unit facing the second magnet, and a third coil unit facing the third magnet, the first to third coil units each comprises a line having a plurality of turns, and the width of the line of the third coil unit is narrower than the width of the line of the first coil unit.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is the National Phase of PCT/KR2019/005618 filed on May10, 2019, which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(a) to PatentApplication Nos. 10-2018-0058200 and 10-2018-0112740 filed in theRepublic of Korea on May 23, 2018 and Sep. 20, 2018, all of which arehereby expressly incorporated by reference into the present application.

TECHNICAL FIELD

Embodiments relate to a lens moving apparatus, and a camera module andan optical instrument including the same.

BACKGROUND ART

It is difficult to apply technology of a voice coil motor (VCM) used inexisting general camera modules to a subminiature, low-power cameramodule, and therefore research related thereto has been activelyconducted.

For a camera module mounted in a small electronic product, such as asmartphone, the camera module may be frequently shocked during usethereof, and the camera module may minutely tremble due to shaking of auser's hand during photographing thereof. In recent years, technologyfor additionally installing a handshake preventing means in the cameramodule has been developed in consideration thereof.

DISCLOSURE Technical Problem

Embodiments provide a lens moving apparatus capable of reducing magneticfield interference between magnets included in two adjacent lens movingapparatuses mounted in a dual camera module, maintaining balance betweenelectromagnetic force in an X-axis direction and electromagnetic forcein a Y-axis direction necessary to perform an OIS function, and reducingthe weight of an OIS moving unit to reduce current consumption, and acamera module and an optical instrument including the same.

Technical Solution

In one embodiment, a lens moving apparatus includes a board, a housingincluding a first side portion and a second side portion opposite eachother and a third side portion and a fourth side portion opposite eachother, a bobbin disposed in the housing, a first coil disposed at thebobbin, and a magnet disposed at the housing, wherein the board includesa second coil opposite the magnet, the magnet includes a first magnetdisposed at the first side portion of the housing, a second magnetdisposed at the second side portion of the housing, and a third magnetdisposed at the third side portion of the housing, the second coilincludes a first coil unit opposite the first magnet, a second coil unitopposite the second magnet, and a third coil unit opposite the thirdmagnet, each of the first to third coil units includes a line having aplurality of turns, and the width of the line of the third coil unit isless than the width of the line of the first coil unit.

The number of turns of the line of the third coil unit may be greaterthan the number of turns of the line of the first coil unit.

The width of the third coil unit may be equal to the width of the firstcoil unit.

The width of the third coil unit may be greater than the width of thefirst coil unit.

Each of the first to third coil units may include a spiral pattern or anoval pattern.

Each of the first to third coil units may include a first layer and asecond layer disposed on the first layer, and the width of the line ofeach of the first layer and the second layer of the third coil unit maybe less than the width of the line of each of the first layer and thesecond layer of the first coil unit.

The width of the line of the first coil unit and the width of the lineof the second coil unit may be equal to each other.

The thickness of the first coil unit and the thickness of the secondcoil unit may be equal to each other.

Each of the first to third coil units may include at least one viaconfigured to interconnect the first layer and the second layer.

The second coil may include a first side and a second side opposite eachother and a third side and a fourth side opposite each other, the boardmay include an opening, and the board may include a first region locatedbetween the first side and the opening, the first coil unit beingdisposed in the first region, a second region located between the secondside and the opening, the second coil unit being disposed in the secondregion, and a third region located between the third side and theopening, the third coil unit being disposed in the third region.

The first coil unit may include a plurality of first lines arranged inthe first region in a direction from the first side to the second side,the second coil unit may include a plurality of second lines arranged inthe second region in the direction from the first side to the secondside, the third coil unit may include a plurality of third linesarranged in the third region in a direction from the third side to thefourth side, the width of each of the first lines may be greater thanthe distance between the first lines, the width of each of the secondlines may be greater than the distance between the second lines, and thewidth of each of the third lines may be greater than the distancebetween the second lines.

The thicknesses of the first to third coil units may be equal to eachother.

The width of the line of each of the first to third coil units may beless than the thickness of each of the first to third coil units.

A first length of each of the first and second coil units may be equalto a second length of the third coil unit, the first length may be thedistance between opposite outermost ends of each of the first and secondcoil units, and the second length may be the distance between theoutermost ends of the third coil unit.

Each of the ratio of the width of the line of the third coil unit to thewidth of the line of the first coil unit and the ratio of the width ofthe line of the third coil unit to the width of the line of the secondcoil unit may be 1:1.25 to 1:1.5.

In another embodiment, a lens moving apparatus includes a board, ahousing including a first side portion and a second side portionadjacent to the first side portion, a bobbin disposed in the housing, afirst coil disposed at the bobbin, a magnet disposed at the housing, anda second coil disposed on the board so as to be opposite the magnet,wherein the magnet includes a first magnet disposed at the first sideportion of the housing and a third magnet disposed at the second sideportion of the housing, the second coil includes a first coil unitopposite the first magnet and a third coil unit opposite the thirdmagnet, and the number of windings of the third coil unit may be greaterthan the number of windings of the first coil unit.

The magnet may further include a second magnet disposed at a third sideportion of the housing opposite the first side portion, and the secondcoil may further include a second coil unit opposite the second magnet.

Advantageous Effects

According to embodiments, it is possible to reduce magnetic fieldinterference between magnets included in two adjacent lens movingapparatuses mounted in a dual camera module, to maintain balance betweenelectromagnetic force in an X-axis direction and electromagnetic forcein a Y-axis direction necessary to perform an OIS function, and toreduce the weight of an OIS moving unit to thus reduce currentconsumption.

DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a lens moving apparatus according to anembodiment.

FIG. 2 is an exploded view of the lens moving apparatus of FIG. 1.

FIG. 3 is a plan view of the lens moving apparatus with a cover memberremoved.

FIG. 4A is a separated perspective view of a bobbin, a first coil unit,a second coil unit, and a sensing magnet.

FIG. 4B is a coupled perspective view of the bobbin, the first coilunit, the second coil unit, and the sensing magnet.

FIG. 5A is a perspective view of a housing, first to third magnets, anda dummy member.

FIG. 5B is a perspective view of the housing, a first position sensor,and a circuit board.

FIG. 6 is a plan view of an upper elastic member.

FIG. 7 is a view illustrating an electrical connection relationshipbetween the upper elastic member, the first position sensor, and asupporting member.

FIG. 8 is a bottom view of a lower elastic member and the housing.

FIG. 9A is a separated perspective view of a second coil, the circuitboard, and a base.

FIG. 9B shows another embodiment including a second position sensor.

FIG. 10A is a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus in an ABdirection of FIG. 3.

FIG. 10B is a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus in a CDdirection of FIG. 3.

FIG. 10C is a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus in an EFdirection of FIG. 3.

FIG. 10D is a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus in a GHdirection of FIG. 3.

FIG. 11 is a plan view of the second coil of FIG. 9B.

FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the first to third magnets, the dummymember, and third to fifth coil units.

FIG. 13 is a side view of the components shown in FIG. 12.

FIG. 14 is a plan view of the components shown in FIG. 12.

FIG. 15 shows first to third magnets according to another embodiment.

FIG. 16A shows first to third magnets according to a further embodiment.

FIG. 16B is a side view of the components shown in FIG. 16A.

FIG. 16C is a plan view of the first to third magnets of FIG. 16A andthe third to fifth coil units.

FIG. 16D is a sectional view of a lens moving apparatus including thethird magnet of FIG. 16A in the CD direction.

FIG. 16E shows a line of magnetic force of the third magnet of FIG. 16Awith respect to the fifth coil unit and a line of magnetic force of thefirst magnet with respect to the third coil unit.

FIG. 16F shows simulation results of electromagnetic force in a Y-axisdirection due to interaction between the first and second magnets andthe third and fourth coil units shown in FIG. 16A and electromagneticforce in an X-axis direction due to interaction between the third magnetand the fifth coil unit.

FIG. 17A is a sectional view of a first dotted-line part of the thirdcoil unit of FIG. 11.

FIG. 17B shows first and second vias of the third coil unit.

FIG. 18A is a sectional view of a second dotted-line part of the fifthcoil unit of FIG. 11.

FIG. 18B shows first and second vias of the fifth coil unit.

FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of a camera module according toan embodiment.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view of a camera module according to anotherembodiment.

FIG. 21A is a schematic view of an embodiment of the camera module shownin FIG. 20.

FIG. 21B is a sectional view of first and second lens moving apparatusesof FIG. 21A in the AB direction of FIG. 3.

FIG. 22 is a schematic view of a camera module according to anotherembodiment.

FIG. 23A shows a simulation result of force applied to a third magnetand a sensing magnet of the camera module of FIG. 22.

FIG. 23B shows a simulation result of stroke variation of the thirdmagnet and the sensing magnet of the camera module of FIG. 22.

FIG. 24 is a schematic view of a camera module according to a furtherembodiment.

FIG. 25 shows an embodiment of a second lens moving apparatus of FIG.24.

FIG. 26A shows an example of disposition of magnets, a sensing magnet,and a balancing magnet of two adjacent lens moving apparatuses of a dualcamera.

FIG. 26B shows another example of the disposition of the magnets, thesensing magnet, and the balancing magnet of the two adjacent lens movingapparatuses of the dual camera.

FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a lens moving apparatus according toanother embodiment.

FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the lens moving apparatus ofFIG. 27.

FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of a first AF mover and a secondAF mover of FIG. 28.

FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of an OIS mover.

FIG. 31A is an exploded perspective view of a stator of FIG. 28.

FIG. 31B is a bottom view of a base of FIG. 31A.

FIG. 32 is a perspective view of a first elastic member and a secondelastic member of FIG. 28.

FIG. 33 is a plan view of the lens moving apparatus of FIG. 27 with acover member removed.

FIG. 34 is a partial enlarged view of FIG. 33.

FIG. 35 is a sectional view of FIG. 27 when viewed from X-Y.

FIG. 36 is a plan view of a circuit member according to an embodiment.

FIG. 37 is a perspective view of first to sixth coil units and first tosixth magnets.

FIG. 38 is a side view of FIG. 37.

FIG. 39A is a plan view of the first to sixth coil units and the firstto sixth magnets.

FIG. 39B is a plan view of first to sixth coil units and first to sixthmagnets according to another embodiment.

FIG. 39C is a plan view of first to sixth coil units and first to sixthmagnets according to a further embodiment.

FIG. 40A shows the disposition position of a first sensor and thedisposition position of a second sensor according to another embodiment.

FIG. 40B shows the disposition of a first sensor and a second sensoraccording to a further embodiment.

FIG. 40C shows a second sensor and a sixth coil unit disposed at aseventh position of FIG. 40B.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of a stator according to anotherembodiment.

FIG. 42 is a perspective view of a camera module according to anembodiment.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view of a portable terminal according to anembodiment.

FIG. 44 is a view showing the construction of the portable terminalshown in FIG. 43.

BEST MODE

Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of whichare illustrated in the accompanying drawings.

In the following description of the embodiments, it will be understoodthat, when each element is referred to as being “on” or “under” anotherelement, it can be “directly” on or under another element or can be“indirectly” formed such that an intervening element is also present. Inaddition, when an element is referred to as being “on” or “under,”“under the element” as well as “on the element” may be included based onthe element.

In addition, relational terms, such as “first,” “second,” “on/upperpart/above,” and “under/lower part/below,” are used only to distinguishbetween one subject or element and another subject or element withoutnecessarily requiring or involving any physical or logical relationshipor sequence between such subjects or elements. In addition, whereverpossible, the same reference numbers will be used throughout thedrawings to refer to the same or like parts.

In addition, the terms “include,” “comprise” and “have” mean thatelements can be inherent unless otherwise stated. Therefore, the termsshould be interpreted not to exclude other elements but to furtherinclude such other elements. In addition, the term “corresponding” maymean at least one of “opposite” or “overlapping.”

For convenience of description, a lens moving apparatus according to anembodiment will be described using a Cartesian coordinate system (x, y,z). However, other different coordinate systems may be used, and thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In the drawings, an x-axis directionand a y-axis direction are directions perpendicular to a z-axisdirection, which is an optical-axis direction. The z-axis direction,which is the optical-axis direction, may be referred to as a “firstdirection,” the x-axis direction may be referred to as a “seconddirection,” and the y-axis direction may be referred to as a “thirddirection.” In addition, the optical-axis direction may be defined as anoptical-axis direction of a lens coupled to the lens moving apparatus.

A “handshake compensation function” applied to a small camera module ofa mobile device, such as a smartphone or a tablet PC, may be a functionof moving a lens in a direction perpendicular to the optical-axisdirection or tilting the lens relative to the optical-axis direction tooffset vibration (or movement) caused by handshake of a user. Meanwhile,the term “handshake compensation” may be used interchangeably with“optical image stabilization (OIS).”

In addition, an “autofocus function” may be a function of moving thelens in the optical-axis direction depending on the distance from asubject to automatically focus the subject in order to acquire a clearimage of a subject on an image sensor.

A lens moving apparatus according to an embodiment may perform anautofocus operation to move an optical module including at least onelens in the first direction.

Also, in the following description, the term “terminal” may refer to apad, an electrode, a conductive layer, or a bonding portion. Also, inthe following description, the term “through-hole” may be referred to asa “hole.”

Hereinafter, the lens moving apparatus may mean a “voice coil motor,” a“lens moving motor,” or an “actuator,” which may be used insteadthereof.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a lens moving apparatus 100 according toan embodiment, FIG. 2 is an exploded view of the lens moving apparatus100 of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 is a plan view of the lens moving apparatus100 with a cover member 300 removed.

Referring to FIGS. 1 to 3, the lens moving apparatus 100 may include abobbin 110, a first coil 120, a housing 140, a first magnet 130-1, asecond magnet 130-2, a third magnet 130-3, an upper elastic member 150,a lower elastic member 160, and a second coil 230.

The lens moving apparatus 100 may further include a dummy member 135.

The lens moving apparatus 100 may further include at least one of a base210, a supporting member 220, and a circuit board 250.

In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100 may further include a circuitboard 190 and a first position sensor 170 configured to perform AFfeedback driving.

In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100 may further include a sensingmagnet 180 configured to sense magnetic force of the first positionsensor 170. In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100 may furtherinclude a balancing magnet 185 configured to attenuate the effect of amagnetic field of the sensing magnet 180.

In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100 may further include a secondposition sensor 240 (see FIG. 9B) configured to perform optical imagestabilization (OIS) feedback driving. In addition, the lens movingapparatus 100 may further include a cover member 300.

The embodiment is capable of providing a lens moving apparatus includingan OIS function capable of reducing or inhibiting magnetic fieldinterference between magnets included in two adjacent lens moving unitsmounted in a dual camera module.

In addition, the embodiment is capable of maintaining balance betweenelectromagnetic force generated in the X-axis direction, which isperpendicular to the optical-axis (OA) direction, and electromagneticforce generated in the Y-axis direction in order to perform the OISfunction, thereby inhibiting tilt of the lens moving units in the X-axisdirection or in the Y-axis direction.

In addition, the embodiment is capable of reducing the number of OISmagnets and reducing the size of the OIS magnets, thereby reducing theweight of an OIS moving unit and thus reducing current consumption.

First, the bobbin 110 will be described.

The bobbin 110 is disposed inside the housing 140, and may be moved inthe optical-axis (OA) direction or the first direction (e.g. the Z-axisdirection) as the result of electromagnetic interaction between thefirst coil 120 and the first and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2.

FIG. 4A is a separated perspective view of the bobbin 110, a first coilunit 120-1, a second coil unit 120-2, and the sensing magnet 180, andFIG. 4B is a coupled perspective view of the bobbin 110, the first coilunit 120-1, the second coil unit 120-2, and the sensing magnet 180.

Referring to FIGS. 4A and 4B, the bobbin 110 may have an opening, inwhich a lens or a lens barrel is mounted. For example, the opening ofthe bobbin 110 may be a through-hole formed through the bobbin 110, andthe shape of the opening of the bobbin 110 may be circular, oval, orpolygonal. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The lens may be directly mounted in the opening of the bobbin 110.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, alens barrel, in which at least one lens is mounted or coupled, may becoupled to or mounted in the opening of the bobbin 110. The lens or thelens barrel may be coupled to an inner circumferential surface 110 a ofthe bobbin 110 in various manners.

The bobbin 110 may include first side portions (or first sides) spacedapart from each other and second side portions (or second sides) spacedapart from each other. Each of the second side portions may interconnecttwo adjacent first side portions. For example, the first side portionsof the bobbin 110 may be referred to as “side portions,” and the secondside portions of the bobbin 110 may be referred to as “corner portionsor corners.”

A first seating recess 41, in which the first coil unit 120-1 ismounted, seated, or disposed, may be provided in one (e.g. a first sideportion) of the side portions of the bobbin 110. A second seating recess42, in which the second coil unit 120-2 is mounted, seated, or disposed,may be provided in another (e.g. a second side portion) of the sideportions of the bobbin 110.

For example, the first seating recess 41 and the second seating recess42 may be provided in two opposite side portions, among the sideportions of the bobbin 110, may be depressed from the outer surfaces ofthe two side portions of the bobbin 110, and may have shapes coincidingwith the shapes of the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit120-2.

In another embodiment, a first protrusion, on which the first coil unit120-1 is mounted or wound, may be provided on one side portion of thebobbin 110, and a second protrusion, on which the second coil unit 120-2is mounted or wound, may be provided on another of the side portions ofthe bobbin 110.

The bobbin 110 may include a first recess 180 a provided in another(e.g. a fourth side portion) of the side portions of the bobbin 110 suchthat the sensing magnet 180 is mounted or disposed in the first recess.For example, the fourth side portion of the bobbin 110 may be the sideportion at which the first coil unit 120-1 or the second coil unit 120-2is not disposed.

In addition, the bobbin 110 may include a second recess provided inanother (e.g. a third side portion) of the side portions of the bobbin110 such that the balancing magnet 185 is mounted or disposed in thesecond recess. For example, the third side portion of the bobbin 110 maybe the side portion at which the first coil unit 120-1 or the secondcoil unit 120-2 is not disposed and which is opposite the third sideportion of the bobbin 110.

The bobbin 110 may include projecting portions 111 provided on thecorner portions of the bobbin 110. The projecting portions 111 mayproject in a direction parallel to a straight line that extends throughthe center of the opening of the bobbin 110 and is perpendicular to theoptical-axis direction. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The projecting portions 111 of the bobbin 110 may correspond to recessedportions 145 of the housing 140, may be inserted into or disposed in therecessed portions 145 of the housing 140, and may inhibit or prevent thebobbin 110 from moving or rotating about the optical axis whiledeviating from a predetermined range.

Escape recesses 122 a configured to avoid spatial interference with afirst frame connection portion 153 of the upper elastic member 150 maybe provided in the upper surfaces of the corner portions of the bobbin110.

Although not shown in FIG. 4A, the bobbin 110 may include a firststopper projecting from the upper surface thereof and a second stopperprojecting from the lower surface thereof. The first and second stoppersof the bobbin 110 may prevent the upper surface of the bobbin 110 fromdirectly colliding with the inside of an upper plate of the cover member30 and may prevent the lower surface of the bobbin 110 from directlycolliding with the base 210, the second coil 230, and/or the circuitboard 250 even though the bobbin 110 is moved while deviating from apredetermined range due to external impact when the bobbin 110 is movedin the first direction in order to perform the autofocus function.

The bobbin 110 may be provided at the upper surface thereof with a firstcoupling portion configured to be coupled and fixed to the upper elasticmember 150, and the bobbin 110 may be provided at the lower surfacethereof with a second coupling portion configured to be coupled andfixed to the lower elastic member 160.

For example, in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the first and second coupling portionsof the bobbin 110 may be flat. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, each of the first and second couplingportions of the bobbin 110 may have the shape of a recess or aprotrusion.

Next, the first coil 120 will be described.

The first coil 120 includes a first coil unit 120-1 and a second coilunit 120-2 disposed at two opposite side portions, among the sideportions of the bobbin 110. Here, the coil unit may be referred to as acoil, a coil portion, a coil block, or a coil ring.

For example, the first coil unit 120-1 may be disposed in the firstseating recess 41 of the bobbin 110, and the second coil unit 120-2 maybe disposed in the second seating recess 42 of the bobbin 110. However,the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, each ofthe first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2 may be wound onat least one protrusion provided at the side portion of the bobbin 110or may be mounted on at least one protrusion provided at the sideportion of the bobbin 110

Each of the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2 mayinclude at least one of an oval shape, a track shape, and a closed-curveshape. For example, each of the first coil unit 120-1 and the secondcoil unit 120-2 may have the shape of a coil ring wound around an axisthat extends through the center of the opening of the bobbin 110 and isperpendicular to the optical axis.

For example, each of the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit120-2 may have a first part 3 a, a second part 3 b disposed under thefirst part 3 a, and a third part 3 c configured to interconnect thefirst part 3 a and the second part 3 b, and may form a closed curve bythe first to third parts 3 a to 3 c.

The third part 3 c may include a first connection part 3 c 1 configuredto interconnect one end of the first part 3 b 1 and one end of thesecond part 3 b and a second connection part 3 c 2 configured tointerconnect the other end of the first part 3 b 1 and the other end ofthe second part 3 b.

For example, the first part 3 a may be referred to as a “first straightportion,” the second part 3 b may be referred to as a “second straightportion,” the third part 3 c may be referred to as a “curved portion,”the first connection part 3 c 1 may be referred to as a first curvedportion, and the second connection part 3 c 2 may be referred to as asecond curved portion.

The first coil 120 may include a connection portion (not shown), aconnection coil, or a connection wire disposed between the first coilunit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2 so as to interconnect thefirst coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2.

One end of the connection portion of the first coil 120 may be connectedto one end of the first coil unit 120-1, and the other end of theconnection portion of the first coil 120 may be connected to one end ofthe second coil unit 120-2. That is, the first coil unit 120-1 and thesecond coil unit 120-2 may be connected to each other in series by theconnection portion of the first coil 120.

The connection portion of the first coil 120 may be opposite the thirdmagnet 130-3, and may be disposed between the third magnet 130-3 and thebobbin 110.

Alternatively, in another embodiment, the connection portion of thefirst coil 120 may be disposed between the fourth side portion of thebobbin 110 and a fourth side portion of the housing 140. For example,the connection portion of the first coil 120 may be opposite the dummymember 135, and may be disposed between the dummy member 135 and thebobbin 110.

In another embodiment, the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coilunit 120-2 may be separated or spaced apart from each other.

When a driving signal (e.g. driving current) is supplied to the firstcoil 120, electromagnetic force may be formed through electromagneticinteraction between the first coil 120 and the first and second magnets130-1 and 130-3, and the bobbin 110 may be moved by the formedelectromagnetic force in the optical-axis (OA) direction.

At an initial position of an AF moving unit, the bobbin 110 may be movedin an upward-downward direction (e.g. the Z-axis direction), which isreferred to as bidirectional driving of the AF moving unit.Alternatively, at the initial position of the AF moving unit, the bobbin110 may be moved in only one of the upward direction and the downwarddirection, which is referred to as unidirectional driving of the AFmoving unit.

Referring to FIG. 10B, at the initial position of the AF moving unit,the first coil unit 120-1 may be opposite or may overlap the firstmagnet 130-1 in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axisand in a direction from the optical axis to the first coil unit 120-1(or the center of the first coil unit 120-1), but is not opposite ordoes not overlap the third magnet 130-3.

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, the second coil unit120-2 may be opposite or may overlap the second magnet 130-2 in adirection that is perpendicular to the optical axis and in a directionfrom the optical axis to the second coil unit 120-2 (or the center ofthe second coil unit 120-2), but is not opposite or does not overlap thethird magnet 130-3.

The AF moving unit may include the bobbin 110 and components coupled tothe bobbin 110. For example, the AF moving unit may include the bobbin110, the first coil 120, the sensing magnet 180, and/or the balancingmagnet. In addition, the AF moving unit may further include the lensmounted in the bobbin 110.

The initial position of the AF moving unit may be the original positionof the AF moving unit in the state in which no electric power is appliedto the first coil 120 or the position at which the AF moving unit islocated as the result of the upper and lower elastic members 150 and 160being elastically deformed due only to the weight of the AF moving unit.In addition, the initial position of the AF moving unit (e.g. the bobbin110) may be the position at which the AF moving unit is located whengravity acts in the direction from the bobbin 110 to the base 210 orwhen gravity acts in the direction from the base 210 to the bobbin 110.

Next, the sensing magnet 180 will be described.

The sensing magnet 180 may be disposed at one of the side portions atwhich the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2 are notdisposed, among the side portions of the bobbin 110. For example, thesensing magnet 180 may be disposed in the first recess 180 a of thebobbin 110.

In the case in which the lens moving apparatus 100 includes thebalancing magnet 185, the balancing magnet 185 may be disposed atanother of the side portions at which the first coil unit 120-1 and thesecond coil unit 120-2 are not disposed, among the side portions of thebobbin 110. For example, the balancing magnet 185 may be disposed in thesecond recess (not shown) of the bobbin 110.

The balancing magnet 185 may offset the magnetic field effect of thesensing magnet 180 and may be balanced in weight with the sensing magnet180, whereby an accurate AF operation may be performed.

The interface between an N pole and an S pole of the sensing magnet 180(and/or the balancing magnet 185) may be parallel to a directionperpendicular to the optical-axis direction. However, the disclosure isnot limited thereto. For example, in another embodiment, the interfacebetween the N pole and the S pole may be parallel to the optical-axisdirection.

For example, the sensing magnet 180 may be a monopolar magnetized magnethaving a single N pole and a single S pole. However, the disclosure isnot limited thereto. In another embodiment, the sensing magnet may be abipolar magnetized magnet.

The sensing magnet 180 may be moved together with the bobbin 110 in theoptical-axis direction OA as the result of interaction between the firstcoil unit 120-1 and the first magnet 130-1 and interaction between thesecond coil unit and the second magnet 130-2. The first position sensor170 may sense the intensity of a magnetic field of the sensing magnet180 moved in the optical-axis direction, and may output an output signalbased on the result of sensing.

For example, a controller 830 of a camera module 200 or a controller 780of a terminal 200A may detect the displacement of the bobbin 110 in theoptical-axis direction based on the output signal output from the firstposition sensor 170.

In another embodiment, the sensing magnet 180 and/or the balancingmagnet 185 may be omitted, the first position sensor may be mounted tothe bobbin, rather than the housing, and the bobbin 2110 and the firstposition sensor are moved in the optical-axis direction due tointeraction between the first coil 2120 and the first magnet 130,whereby the first position sensor may sense the intensity of themagnetic field of the first magnet and may output an output signal basedon the result of sensing.

Next, the housing 140 will be described.

The housing 140 receives at least a portion of the bobbin 110 therein,and supports the first magnet 130-1, the second magnet 130-2, the thirdmagnet 130-3, and the dummy member 135.

For example, the OIS moving unit (or the lens moving unit) may includethe AF moving unit and the housing 140. For example, the OIS moving unit(or the lens moving unit) may include the components (e.g. 130-1 to130-3, 135, 190, and 170) mounted to the housing 140.

For example, the OIS moving unit (or the lens moving unit) may be movedby OIS driving based on electromagnetic force caused by interactionbetween the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and the second coil230.

FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the housing 140, the first to thirdmagnets 130-1 to 130-3, and the dummy member 135, and FIG. 5B is aperspective view of the housing 140, the first position sensor 170, andthe circuit board 190.

Referring to FIGS. 5A and 5B, the housing 140 may be disposed inside thecover member 300, and may be disposed between the cover member 300 andthe bobbin 110. The housing 140 may receive the bobbin 110 therein.

The outer surface of the housing 140 may be spaced apart from the innersurface of a side plate of the cover member 300, and the housing 140 maybe moved in a space between the housing 140 and the cover member 300 byOIS driving.

The housing 140 may generally have a hollow pillar shape including anopening or a hollow portion.

For example, the housing 140 may have a polygonal (e.g. quadrangular oroctagonal) or circular opening. For example, the opening of the housing140 may be a through-hole, in which the bobbin 110 is received.

The housing 140 may include a plurality of side portions 141-1 to 141-4and a plurality of corner portions 142-1 to 142-4.

For example, the housing 140 may include first to fourth side portions141-1 to 141-4 and first to fourth corner portions 142-1 to 142-4.

The first to fourth side portions 141-1 to 141-4 of the housing 140 maybe spaced apart from each other. Each of the corner portions 142-1 to142-4 of the housing 140 may be disposed or located between two adjacentside portions 141-1 and 141-2, 141-2 and 141-3, 141-3 and 141-4, or141-4 and 141-1, and may interconnect the side portions 141-1 to 141-4.

For example, the corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140 maybe located at the corners of the housing 140. For example, the number ofside portions of the housing 140 may be four, and the number of cornerportions thereof may be four. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

Each of the side portions 141-1 to 141-4 of the housing 140 may bedisposed parallel to a corresponding one of the side plates of the covermember 300

The horizontal length of each of the side portions 141-1 to 141-4 of thehousing 140 may be greater than the horizontal length of each of thecorner portions 142-1 to 142-4 thereof. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto.

The first side portion 141-1 and the second side portion 141-2 of thehousing 140 may be located so as to be opposite each other or to faceeach other, and the third side portion 141-3 and the fourth side portion141-4 may be located so as to be opposite each other or to face eachother. Each of the third side portion 141-3 and the fourth side portion141-4 of the housing 140 may be located between the first side portion141-1 and the second side portion 141-2.

The housing 140 may be provided on the upper portion, the upper end, orthe upper surface thereof with a stopper 144 in order to prevent directcollision with the inner surface of the upper plate of the cover member300.

For example, the stopper 144 may be provided at the upper surface (e.g.a first surface 51 a) of each of the corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 ofthe housing 140. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In addition, the housing 140 may be provided on the upper portion, theupper end, or the upper surface of each of the corner portions 142-1 to142-4 thereof with a guide projecting portion 146 configured to guide adamper coated on the supporting member 220.

The housing 140 may be provided on the upper portion, the upper end, orthe upper surface thereof with at least one first coupling portioncoupled to a first outer frame 152 of the upper elastic member 150. Inaddition, the housing 140 may be provided on the lower portion, thelower end, or the lower surface thereof with at least one secondcoupling portion coupled and fixed to a second outer frame 162 of thelower elastic member 160.

Each of the first coupling portion and the second coupling portion ofthe housing 140 may be a plane, a recess, or a protrusion.

The first coupling portion of the housing 140 may be coupled to a hole152 a of the first outer frame 152 of the upper elastic member 150 andthe second coupling portion of the housing 140 may be coupled to a hole162 a of the second outer frame 162 of the lower elastic member 160 bythermal fusion or using an adhesive.

The housing 140 may include a first seating portion 141 a provided inone (e.g. the first side portion 141-1) of two side portions locatedopposite each other such that the first magnet 130-1 is disposed thereinand a second seating portion 141 b provided in the other 141-2 of thetwo side portions such that the second magnet 130-2 is disposed therein.

In addition, the housing 140 may include a third seating portion 141 cprovided in one (e.g. the third side portion 141-3) of two other sideportions located opposite each other such that the third magnet 130-3 isdisposed therein and a fourth seating portion 141 d provided in theother 141-4 of the other two side portions such that the dummy member135 is disposed therein.

Each of the first to third seating portions 141 a to 141 c of thehousing 140 may be provided in the inner surface of a corresponding oneof the side portions of the housing 140. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. Each of the first to third seating portions 141 a to141 c of the housing 140 may be provided in the outer surface of acorresponding one of the side portions of the housing 140.

Each of the first to third seating portions 141 a to 141 c of thehousing 140 may be a recess having a shape corresponding to orcoinciding with a corresponding one of the first to third magnets 130-1to 130-3, e.g. a concave recess. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

For example, a first opening opposite the first coil unit 120-1 (or thesecond coil unit) and a second opening opposite a third coil unit 230-1(or a fourth coil unit 230-2) may be formed in the first seating portion141 a (or the second seating portion 141 b) of the housing 140. Theopenings are provided to easily mount the magnet 130. In anotherembodiment, at least one of the first and second openings may beomitted.

A first opening opposite the outer surface of the bobbin 110 and asecond opening opposite a fifth coil unit 230-3 may be formed in thethird seating portion 141 c of the housing 140. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least one of the firstand second openings may be omitted.

The fourth seating portion 141 d of the housing 140 may include a firstopening configured to be open toward the outer surface of the fourthside portion 141-4 of the housing 140 and a second opening configured tobe open toward the lower surface of the fourth side portion of thehousing 140. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, at least one of the first and second openings may beomitted.

For example, one side surface of the magnet 130-1, 130-2, or 130-3 fixedto or disposed in the seating portion 141 a, 141 b, or 141 c of thehousing 140 may be exposed through the first opening of the seatingportion 141 a, 141 b, or 141 c. In addition, the lower surface of themagnet 130-1, 130-2, or 130-3 fixed to or disposed in the seatingportion 141 a, 141 b, or 141 c of the housing 140 may be exposed throughthe second opening of the seating portion 141 a, 141 b, or 141 c.

One side surface of the dummy member 135 fixed to or disposed in theseating portion 141 d of the housing 140 may be exposed to the outersurface of the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140 through thefirst opening, and the lower surface of the dummy member 135 may beexposed through the second opening.

For example, the first to third magnets 130-1, 130-2, and 130-3 and thedummy member 135 may be fixed respectively to the seating portions 141 ato 141 d using an adhesive.

Supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may be disposed at the corner portions142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140. Holes 147 a defining paths alongwhich the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 extend may be provided inthe corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140.

For example, the housing 140 may include holes 147 a formed through theupper portions of the corner portions 142-1 to 142-4.

In another embodiment, the holes provided in the corner portions 142-1to 142-4 of the housing 140 may be depressed from the outer surfaces ofthe corner portions of the housing 140, and at least a portion of eachof the holes may be open toward the outer surface of a corresponding oneof the corner portions. The number of holes 147 a of the housing 140 maybe equal to the number of supporting members.

The housing 140 may be provided with at least one stopper (not shown)projecting from the outer surfaces of the side portions 141-1 to 141-4thereof. The at least one stopper may prevent the housing 140 fromcolliding with the cover member 300 when moved in a directionperpendicular to the optical axis.

In order to prevent the lower surface of the housing 140 from collidingwith the base 210 and/or the circuit board 250, the housing 140 may befurther provided with a stopper (not shown) projecting from the lowersurface thereof.

In order to secure paths along which the supporting members 220-1 to220-4 extend and to secure a space to be filled with silicone capable ofserving as a damper, the housing may be provided in the lower part orthe lower ends of the corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 thereof withrecesses 148. For example, the recesses 148 of the housing 140 and theholes 147 a of the housing 140 may be connected to each other. Forexample, the lower ends of the holes 147 a of the housing 140 may beopen toward the recesses 148 of the housing 140.

The housing 140 may be provided in the fourth side portion 141-1 thereofwith a first recess 14 a configured to receive the circuit board 190 anda second recess 14 b configured to receive the first position sensor170.

In order to easily mount the circuit board 190, the first recess 14 a ofthe housing 140 may be open at the upper part thereof, and may have ashape corresponding to or coinciding with the shape of the circuit board190.

The second recess 14 b may have an opening configured to be openinwardly of the housing 140, and may abut or may be connected to thefirst recess 14 a. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Thesecond recess 14 b may have a shape corresponding to or coinciding withthe shape of the first position sensor 170.

Next, the first magnet 130-1, the second magnet 130-2, the third magnet130-3 will be described.

The first magnet 130-1, the second magnet 130-2, and the third magnet130-3 may be disposed at the housing 140 so as to be spaced apart fromeach other. For example, each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to130-3 may be disposed between the bobbin 110 and the housing 140.

The first magnet 130-1, the second magnet 130-2, and the third magnet130-3 may be disposed at the side portions of the housing 140.

The first magnet 130-1 and the second magnet 130-2 may be disposedrespectively at two opposite side portions 141-1 and 141-2, among theside portions 141-1 to 141-4 of the housing 140.

For example, the first magnet 130-1 may be disposed at the first sideportion 141-1 of the housing 140, and the second magnet 130-2 may bedisposed at the second side portion 141-2 of the housing 140, which isopposite the first side portion 141-1. For example, the third magnet130-3 may be disposed at the third side portion 141-3 of the housing140.

For example, each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may bedisposed in a corresponding one of the first to third seating portions141 a to 141 c of the housing 140.

The first and second coil units 120-1 and 120-2 for AF driving aredisposed at two opposite side portions of the bobbin 110, and no coilunit for AF driving is disposed between the bobbin 110 and the thirdmagnet 130-3. In addition, no coil unit for AF driving is disposedbetween the bobbin 110 and the dummy member 135.

In addition, for OIS driving, the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3 and the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 correspond to eachother in the optical-axis direction, and the second coil 230 for OISdriving is not disposed between the dummy member 135 and the circuitboard 250.

For example, the first magnet 130-1 may include a first surface oppositethe first coil unit 120-1, and the first surface of the first magnet130-1 may include two poles, namely an N pole and an S pole, and a firstpartition 11 c located between the two poles. For example, the firstpartition 11 c may be a nonmagnetic partition.

For example, the first magnet 130-1 may include a second surfaceopposite the third coil unit 230-1 in the optical-axis direction, andthe second surface of the first magnet 130-1 may include two poles,namely an N pole and an S pole.

For example, the second magnet 130-2 may include a first surfaceopposite the second coil unit 120-2, and the first surface of the secondmagnet 130-2 may include two poles, namely an N pole and an S pole, anda second partition 12 c located between the two poles. For example, thesecond partition 12 c may be a nonmagnetic partition.

For example, the second magnet 130-2 may include a second surfaceopposite the fourth coil unit 230-2 in the optical-axis direction, andthe second surface of the second magnet 130-2 may include two poles,namely an N pole and an S pole.

For example, the third magnet 130-3 may include a first surface oppositethe side portion of the bobbin 110 opposite the side portion 141-3 ofthe housing 140, at which the third magnet 130-3 is disposed, and thefirst surface of the third magnet 130-3 may include two poles, namely anN pole and an S pole.

In addition, for example, the third magnet 130-3 may include a secondsurface opposite the fifth coil unit 230-3 in the optical-axisdirection, and the second surface of the third magnet 130-3 may includetwo poles, namely an N pole and an S pole, and a third partition 13 clocated between the two poles. For example, the third partition 13 c maybe a nonmagnetic partition 13 c.

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, the first magnet 130-1may overlap the first coil unit 120-1 in a direction that isperpendicular to the optical axis and in a direction from the opticalaxis to the first coil unit 120-1 (or the center of the first coil unit120-1).

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, the second magnet 130-2may overlap the second coil unit 120-2 in a direction that isperpendicular to the optical axis and in a direction from the opticalaxis to the second coil unit 120-2 (or the center of the second coilunit 120-2).

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, the third magnet 130-3may not be opposite or may not overlap the first coil unit 120-1 and thesecond coil unit 120-2 in a direction that is perpendicular to theoptical axis and a direction from the third side portion 141-3 to thefourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140.

For example, each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may bedisposed in a corresponding one of the first to third seating portions141 a to 141 c of the housing 140.

The first magnet 130-1 may overlap the second magnet 130-2 in adirection that is perpendicular to the optical axis and a direction fromthe first side portion 141-1 to the second side portion 141-2 of thehousing 140, and may not overlap the third magnet 130-3.

Each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may have a polyhedralshape that is easily seated or disposed in a corresponding one of thefirst to third seating portions 141 a to 141 c of the housing 140. Forexample, each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may have aflat shape. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

Each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may be a 4-pole magnetincluding two N poles and two S poles. Here, the 4-pole magnet may bereferred to as a bipolar magnetized magnet. The first to third magnets130-1 to 130-3 will be described later.

The dummy member 135 may be disposed at the fourth side portion 141-4 ofthe housing 140. The dummy member 135 may be a nonmagnetic material.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,the dummy member may include a magnetic material. For example, the dummymember 135 may be a metal or an insulator.

The dummy member 135 may have the same mass as the third magnet 130-3.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. For weight balance, thedummy member 135 may be disposed at the side portion 141-1 locatedopposite the side portion 141-3 at which the third magnet 130-3 isdisposed.

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, the dummy member 135 maynot be opposite or may not overlap the first coil unit 120-1 and thesecond coil unit 120-2 in a direction that is perpendicular to theoptical axis and a direction from the third side portion 141-3 to thefourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140.

The dummy member 135 may overlap the third magnet 130-3 in a directionthat is perpendicular to the optical axis and a direction from the thirdside portion 141-3 to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140.

For example, the dummy member 135 may not overlap the first and secondmagnets 130-1 and 130-2 in a direction from the third side portion 141-3to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140.

In addition, at least a portion of the dummy member 135 may overlap theposition sensor 170 in a direction that is perpendicular to the opticalaxis and a direction from the third side portion 141-3 to the fourthside portion 141-4 of the housing 140. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, both may not overlap each other.

In the case in which the dummy member 135 includes a magnetic material,the magnitude of magnetism of the dummy member 135 may be less than themagnitude of magnetism of the third magnet 130-3. As lens moving unitsare disposed such that dummy members included in the lens moving unitsare adjacent to each other, therefore, a camera module according to anembodiment is capable of reducing magnetic field interference betweenmagnets included in two adjacent lens moving units.

For example, the dummy member 135 may include tungsten, and tungsten mayaccount for 95% or more of the total weight thereof. For example, thedummy member 135 may be a tungsten alloy.

The dummy member 135 may have a polyhedral shape, such as a rectangularparallelepiped shape. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.The dummy member 135 may have any of various shapes. For example, thedummy member 135 may be rounded or curved at the side edge thereof.

Next, the circuit board 190 and the first position sensor 170 will bedescribed.

The first position sensor 170 and the circuit board 190 are disposed atone of the side portions of the housing 140. For example, the firstposition sensor 170 and the circuit board 190 may be disposed at thefourth side portion 141-4 of the housing 140, at which the dummy member135 is disposed. This disposition is provided to avoid spatialinterference between the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and thecircuit board 190 at which the first position sensor 170 is mounted.

For example, the circuit board 190 may be disposed in the first recess14 a of the housing 140, and the first position sensor 170 may bedisposed or mounted at the circuit board 190.

At the initial position of the AF moving unit, at least a portion of thefirst position sensor 170 may overlap the sensing magnet 180 in adirection that is perpendicular to the optical axis and in a directionfrom the optical axis to the first position sensor 170. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto.

The first position sensor 170 may be disposed at a first surface of thecircuit board 190. Here, the first surface of the circuit board 190mounted to the housing 140 may be a surface opposite the inside of thehousing 140 (or the outer surface of the bobbin 110).

The first position sensor 170 may be configured in the form of a driverintegrated circuit (IC) including a Hall sensor, or may be realized as aposition sensor, such as a Hall sensor, alone.

In the case in which the first position sensor 170 is realized as a Hallsensor alone, the first position sensor 170 may include two inputterminals and two output terminals. Each of the input terminals and theoutput terminals of the first position sensor 170 may be connected to acorresponding one of first to fourth pads of the circuit board 190.

For example, the circuit board 190 may be a printed circuit board or anFPCB.

For example, the first to fourth terminals of the circuit board 190 maybe connected respectively to upper springs 150-1 to 150-4, and may beconnected to the circuit board 250 via the supporting members 220-1 to220-4. The first position sensor 170 may be connected to the circuitboard 250. For example, the two input terminals and the two outputterminals of the first position sensor 170 may be connected to terminalsof the circuit board 250 via the circuit board 190, the upper springs150-1 to 150-4, and the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4

In the case in which the first position sensor 170 is a driver ICincluding a Hall sensor, the first position sensor may include fourterminals configured to transmit and receive a clock signal SCL, a datasignal SDA, and electric power signals VCC and GND and two terminalsconfigured to provide a driving signal to the first coil 120.

Next, the upper elastic member 150, the lower elastic member 160, thesupporting member 220, the second coil 230, the circuit board 250, andthe base 210 will be described.

FIG. 6 is a plan view of the upper elastic member 150, FIG. 7 is a viewillustrating an electrical connection relationship between the upperelastic member 150, the first position sensor 170, and the supportingmember 220, FIG. 8 is a bottom view of the lower elastic member 160 andthe housing 140, FIG. 9A is a separated perspective view of the base210, the second coil 230, and the circuit board 250, and FIG. 9B showsanother embodiment including a second position sensor 240.

Referring to FIGS. 6 to 9A, the upper elastic member 150 may be coupledto the upper portion, the upper surface, or the upper end of the bobbin110 and to the upper portion, the upper surface, or the upper end of thehousing 140. The lower elastic member 160 may be coupled to the lowerportion, the lower surface, or the lower end of the bobbin 110 and tothe lower portion, the lower surface, or the lower end of the housing140.

The upper elastic member 150 and the lower elastic member 160 mayconstitute an elastic member. The elastic member may be coupled to thebobbin and the housing. The elastic member may elastically support thebobbin 110 relative to the housing 140.

The upper elastic member 150 may include a plurality of upper springs150-1 to 150-4 separated from each other. In FIG. 6, four upper springsseparated from each other are shown. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, the number of upper springs maybe two or more.

For example, the first upper spring 150-1 may be disposed on the firstcorner portion 142-1 and the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing140.

For example, the second upper spring 150-2 may be disposed on the fourthside portion 141-4 and the second corner portion 142-2 of the housing140.

For example, the third upper spring 150-3 may be disposed on the secondcorner portion 142-2, the second side portion 141-2, and the thirdcorner portion 142-3 of the housing 140.

For example, the fourth upper spring 150-4 may be disposed on the fourthcorner portion 142-4, the first side portion 141-1, and the first cornerportion 142-1 of the housing 140.

At least one of the first to fourth upper springs 150-1 to 150-4 mayfurther include a first inner frame 151 coupled to the bobbin 110, afirst outer frame 152 coupled to the housing 140, and a first frameconnection portion 153 configured to interconnect the first inner frame151 and the first outer frame 152. In another embodiment, the innerframe may be referred to as an “inner portion,” the outer frame 152 maybe referred to as an “outer portion,” and the frame connection portionmay be referred to as a “connection portion.”

For example, each of the first and second upper springs 150-1 and 150-2may include a first outer frame 152 and may not include a first innerframe and a first frame connection portion. Each of the third and fourthupper springs 150-3 and 150-4 may include a first inner frame 151, afirst outer frame 152, and a first frame connection portion 153.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

For example, the first inner frame 151 may be provided with a hole 151a, into which the first coupling portion of the bobbin 110 is coupled.In addition, for example, the first outer frame 152 may be provided witha hole 152 a, into which the first coupling portion of the housing 140is coupled.

The first outer frames 152 of the first to fourth upper springs 150-1 to150-4 may have contact portions P1 to P4 connected to the terminals ofthe circuit board 190, respectively.

The first outer frame 152 of each of the first to fourth upper springs150-1 to 150-4 may include a first coupling portion 510 coupled to acorresponding one of the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4, a secondcoupling portion 520 coupled to a corresponding one of the cornerportions of the housing 140, and a connection portion 530 configured tointerconnect the first coupling portion 510 and the second couplingportion 520.

For example, the connection portion 530 may include a first connectionportion 530-1 configured to interconnect the first coupling portion 510and a first region of the second coupling portion 520 and a secondconnection portion 530-2 configured to interconnect the first couplingportion 510 and a second region of the second coupling portion 520. Theconnection portion 530 may include a portion that is bent or curved atleast once.

The lower elastic member 160 may include two lower springs. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the lowerelastic member may include a single lower spring or three or more lowersprings.

For example, each of the first and second lower springs 160-1 and 160-2may include a second inner frame 161 coupled or fixed to the lowerportion, the lower surface, or the lower end of the bobbin 110, a secondouter frame 162 coupled or fixed to the lower portion, the lowersurface, or the lower end of the housing 140, and a second frameconnection portion 163 configured to interconnect the second inner frame161 and the second outer frame 162.

Each of the first frame connection portion 153 of the upper elasticmember 150 and the second frame connection portion 163 of the lowerelastic member 160 may be formed so as to be bent or curved (or crooked)at least once in order to form a predetermined pattern. The upwardand/or downward movement of the bobbin 110 in the first direction may beflexibly (or elastically) supported through positional change and minutedeformation of the first and second frame connection portions 153 and163.

The second inner frame 161 may be provided with a hole 161 a, into whichthe second coupling portion of the bobbin 110 is coupled, and the secondouter frame 162 may be provided with a hole 162 a, into which the secondcoupling portion of the housing 140 is coupled.

Each of the upper springs 150-1 to 150-4 and the lower springs 160-1 and160-2 may be realized as a leaf spring; however, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. Each of the upper springs and the lower springs may berealized as a coil spring or the like. In addition, for the uppersprings and the lower springs, the “spring” may be referred to as an“elastic unit.”

In order to absorb or alleviate vibration of the bobbin 110, the lensmoving apparatus 100 may further include a first damper (not shown)disposed between each of the upper springs 150-1 to 150-4 and the bobbin110 (or the housing 140).

For example, the first damper (not shown) may be disposed in a spacebetween the first frame connection portion 153 of each of the uppersprings 150-1 to 150-4 and the bobbin 110.

In addition, for example, the lens moving apparatus 100 may furtherinclude a second damper (not shown) disposed between the second frameconnection portion 163 of the lower elastic member 160 and the bobbin110 (or the housing 140).

In addition, for example, the lens moving apparatus 100 may furtherinclude a third damper (not shown) disposed between the supportingmember 220 and the hole 147 a of the housing 140.

In addition, for example, the lens moving apparatus 100 may furtherinclude a fourth damper (not shown) disposed at the first couplingportion 510 and one end of the supporting member 220, and may furtherinclude a fifth damper (not shown) disposed at the other end of thesupporting member 220 and the circuit board 250.

In addition, for example, a damper (not shown) may be further disposedbetween the inner surface of the housing 140 and the outer surface ofthe bobbin 110.

Next, the supporting member 220 will be described.

The supporting member 220 may support the housing 140 so as to bemovable relative to the base 210 in a direction perpendicular to theoptical axis. The supporting member 220 may connect at least one of theupper and lower elastic members 150 and 160 to the circuit board 250.

The supporting member 220 may include a plurality of supporting members220-1 to 220-4.

For example, the supporting member may include first to fourthsupporting members 220-1 to 220-4 corresponding to the corner portions142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140.

Each of the first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may bedisposed at a corresponding one of the first to fourth corner portions142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140, and may connect a corresponding oneof the first to fourth upper springs 150-1 to 150-4 to the circuit board250.

For example, each of the first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to220-4 may connect a corresponding one of the first to fourth uppersprings 150-1 to 150-4 to a corresponding one of the terminals of thecircuit board 250.

The first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may be spacedapart from the housing 140, not fixed to the housing 140, and one end ofeach of the first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may bedirectly connected or coupled to the first coupling portion 510 of acorresponding one of the first to fourth upper springs 150-1 to 150-4 bysoldering.

In addition, the other end of each of the first to fourth supportingmembers 220-1 to 220-4 may be directly connected or coupled to thecircuit board 250 by soldering. For example, the other end of each ofthe first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may be directlyconnected or coupled to the lower surface of the circuit board 250. Inanother embodiment, the other end of each of the supporting members220-1 to 220-4 may be coupled to a circuit member 231 of the second coil230 or the base 210.

For example, each of the first to fourth supporting members 220-1 to220-4 may extend through the hole 147 a formed in a corresponding one ofthe corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 of the housing 140. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the supportingmembers may be disposed adjacent to boundary lines between the sideportions 141-1 to 141-4 and the corner portions 142 of the housing 140,and may not extend through the corner portions 142-1 to 142-4 of thehousing 140.

The first coil 120 may be connected to the lower elastic member 150.

In the case in which the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit120-2 are connected to each other (CASE1), one end of the first coilunit 120-1 may be connected or coupled to the second inner frame 161 ofone (e.g. 160-2) of the first to fourth lower springs 160-1 to 160-4,and one end of the second coil unit 120-2 may be connected or coupled tothe second inner frame 161 of another (e.g. 160-4) of the first tofourth lower springs 160-1 to 160-4.

When the first position sensor 170 is realized as a position sensor,such as a Hall sensor, alone in CASE1, the two lower springs (e.g. 160-2and 160-4) connected to the first coil unit 120-1 and the second coilunit 120-2 may be connected to the terminals of the circuit board 250,and a single driving signal may be provided to the first coil unit 120-1and the second coil unit 120-2 through the circuit board 250.

When the first position sensor 170 is configured in the form of a driverintegrated circuit (IC) including a Hall sensor in CASE1, the two lowersprings (e.g. 160-2 and 160-4) connected to the first coil unit 120-1and the second coil unit 120-2 may be connected to the first positionsensor 170, and a single driving signal may be provided to the firstcoil unit 120-1 and the second coil unit 120-2 through the firstposition sensor 170.

In the case of another embodiment in which the first coil unit 120-1 andthe second coil unit 120-2 are separated from each other (CASE2), thefirst coil unit 120-1 may be connected or coupled to the second innerframes of two (e.g. 160-1 and 160-2) of the first to fourth lowersprings 160-1 to 160-4, and the second coil unit 120-2 may be connectedor coupled to the second inner frames of the other two (e.g. 160-3 and160-4) of the first to fourth lower springs.

When the first position sensor 170 is realized as a position sensor,such as a Hall sensor, alone in CASE2, the first to fourth lower springs160-1 to 160-4 may be connected to the circuit board 250. For example,the first to fourth lower springs 160-1 to 160-4 may be connected to theterminals of the circuit board 250, and individual driving signals (e.g.driving currents) may be provided to the first coil unit 120-1 and thesecond coil unit 120-2 through the circuit board 250.

When the first position sensor 170 is configured in the form of a driverintegrated circuit (IC) including a Hall sensor in CASE2, the first tofourth lower springs 160-1 to 160-4 may be connected to the firstposition sensor 170, and individual driving signals (e.g. drivingcurrents) may be provided to the first coil unit 120-1 and the secondcoil unit 120-2 through the first position sensor 170.

The supporting member 220 may be realized as an elastic supportingmember, such as a suspension wire, a leaf spring, or a coil spring.Also, in another embodiment, the supporting member 220 may be integrallyformed with the upper elastic member 150.

Next, the base 210, the circuit board 250, and the second coil 230 willbe described.

Referring to FIG. 9A, the base 210 may disposed under the bobbin 110 (orthe housing 140).

The base 210 may have an opening corresponding to the opening of thebobbin 110 and/or the opening of the housing 140, and may be formed in ashape coinciding with or corresponding to the shape of the cover member300, such as a quadrangular shape.

A prop portion 255 or a supporting portion may be provided in a regionof the base 210 opposite a terminal 251 of the circuit board 250. Theprop portion 255 of the base 210 may support a terminal portion of aterminal surface 253 of the circuit board 250 at which the terminal 251is formed.

The base 210 may be provided in each corner portion thereof with aconcave recess 212 in order to avoid spatial interference with the otherend of a corresponding one of the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4coupled to the circuit board 250.

In addition, the base 210 may be provided on the upper surface aroundthe opening thereof with a projecting portion 19, which is coupled tothe opening of the circuit board 250 and an opening 231 a of the circuitmember 231.

In addition, the base 210 may be provided in the lower surface thereofwith a seating portion (not shown), in which a filter 610 of the cameramodule 200 is installed.

The circuit board 250 is disposed on the upper surface of the base 210,and may have an opening corresponding to the opening of the bobbin 110,the opening of the housing 140, and/or the opening of the base 210. Thecircuit board 250 may be formed in a shape coinciding with orcorresponding to the shape of the upper surface of the base 210, such asa quadrangular shape.

The circuit board 250 may have at least one terminal surface 253, whichis bent from the upper surface thereof and at which a plurality ofterminals 251 or pins configured to receive electrical signals fromoutside is provided. For example, the circuit board 250 may include twoterminal surfaces disposed at two opposite sides, among the sides of theupper surface of the circuit board 250. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto.

Driving signals may be provided to the first coil 120 and the secondcoil 230 through the plurality of terminals 251 provided at the terminalsurface 253 of the circuit board 250. In addition, through the terminals251 of the circuit board 250, a driving signal may be provided to thefirst position sensor 170, an output signal of the first position sensor170 may be received and output, a driving signal may be provided to thesecond position sensor 240, and an output signal of the second positionsensor 240 may be received and output.

The driving signal provided to the first coil 120 and/or the second coil230 may be a direct-current signal or an alternating-current signal, andmay have the form of current or voltage.

The circuit board 250 may be an FPCB. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. The terminals of the circuit board 250 may be directlyformed on the surface of the base 210 using a surface electrode schemeor the like.

In order to avoid spatial interference with the supporting members, thecircuit board 250 may include holes 250 a through which the supportingmembers 220-1 to 220-4 extend. The position and number of holes 250 amay correspond to or coincide with the position and number of supportingmembers 220-1 to 220-4.

In another embodiment, the circuit board 250 may be provided in thecorner portions thereof with escape recesses instead of the holes 250 a.

For example, the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may extend throughthe holes 250 a of the circuit board 250 and may be connected to acircuit pattern disposed at the lower surface of the circuit board 250via solder. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In another embodiment, the circuit board 250 may have no holes, and thesupporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may be connected to a circuit patternor a pad disposed at the upper surface of the circuit board 250 viasolder.

In a further embodiment, the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may beconnected to the circuit member 231, and the circuit member 231 mayconnect the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 to the circuit board 250.

The second coil 230 may be disposed under the bobbin 110 (or thehousing), and may be disposed on the upper surface of the circuit board250.

The second coil 230 may include a third coil unit 230-1 corresponding tothe first magnet 130-1 disposed at the housing 140, a fourth coil unit230-2 corresponding to the second magnet 130-2, and a fifth coil unit230-3 corresponding to the third magnet 130-3.

For example, the third coil unit 230-1 may be opposite or may overlapthe first magnet 130-1 in the optical-axis direction, the fourth coilunit 230-2 may be opposite or may overlap the second magnet 130-2 in theoptical-axis direction, and the fifth coil unit 230-3 may be opposite ormay overlap the third magnet 130-3 in the optical-axis direction.

Each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may have aclosed-curve shape having a central hole, such as a ring shape, and thecentral hole may be formed so as to face the optical-axis direction.

For example, the third coil unit 230-1 and the fourth coil unit 230-2may be disposed so as to face each other in a direction from the firstmagnet 130-1 to the second magnet 130-2.

In addition, for example, each of third coil unit 230-1 and the fourthcoil unit 230-2 may not overlap the fifth coil unit 230-3 in thedirection from the first magnet 130-1 to the second magnet 130-2.

For example, the second coil 230 may further include a quadrangularcircuit member 231 at which the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3are formed.

Here, the circuit member 231 may be referred to as a “board,” and theboard 231 may include the second coil 230. In addition, for example, thefirst coil unit 120-1 may be referred to as a first coil, the secondcoil unit 120-2 may be referred to as a second coil, and the second coil230 may be referred to as a third coil. At this time, the board 231 mayinclude the third coil.

For example, the circuit member 231 may include four sides 23 a to 23 d(see FIG. 11), and may include an opening 231 a corresponding to theopening of the housing 140, the opening of the circuit board 250, and/orthe opening of the base 210.

Each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be disposed ata corresponding one of three sides of the circuit member 231, and nocoil unit may be disposed at the remaining one side of the circuitmember 231.

For example, each of the third coil unit 230-1 and the fourth coil unit230-2 may be disposed parallel to a corresponding one of the first andsecond opposite sides of the circuit member 231, and the fifth coil unit230-3 may be disposed parallel to the third side or the fourth side ofthe circuit member 231.

In order to avoid spatial interference with the supporting members 220-1to 220-4, holes 230 a may be provided in the corners of the circuitmember 231, and the supporting members 220-1 to 220-4 may extend throughthe holes 230 a of the circuit member 231. In another embodiment, thecircuit member may have recesses provided at the corners thereof insteadof the holes in order to avoid spatial interference with the supportingmembers.

The third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be connected to thecircuit board 250. For example, each of the third to fifth coil units230-1 to 230-3 may be connected to a corresponding one of the terminalsof the circuit board 250.

The circuit board 250 may include bonding portions or pads connected tothe third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3, and the bonding portionsor pads of the circuit board 250 may be connected to the terminals ofthe circuit board 250.

In FIG. 9, the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be formed atthe circuit member 231, rather than the circuit board 250. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, each of thethird to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be configured in the formof a ring-shaped coil block or an FP coil. In a further embodiment, eachof the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be configured in theform of a circuit pattern formed on the circuit board 250.

The circuit board 250 and the circuit member 231 are separatecomponents, which are referred to individually. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the circuit board 250 andthe circuit member 231 may be commonly referred to as a “circuitmember.” In this case, the other end of each of the supporting membersmay be coupled to the “circuit member” (e.g. the lower surface of thecircuit member).

Referring to FIG. 9B, the lens moving apparatus 100 may further includea second position sensor 240 for OIS feedback driving. The secondposition sensor 240 may include a first sensor 240 a and a second sensor240 b.

Each of the first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may be a Hallsensor, and any sensor may be used as long as the sensor is capable ofsensing the magnitude of a magnetic field. For example, each of thefirst sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may be configured in theform of a driver including a Hall sensor, or may be realized as aposition sensor, such as a Hall sensor, alone.

For example, the first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may bedisposed or mounted at the lower surface of the circuit board 250,seating recesses 215-1 and 215-2 may be provided in the upper surface ofthe base 210, and the first and second sensors 240 a and 240 b may bedisposed in the seating recesses 215-1 and 215-2 of the base 210.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,the first and second sensors may be disposed at the upper surface of thecircuit board 250.

The first sensor 240 a may be disposed so as to be opposite or tooverlap one of the first magnet 130-1 and the second magnet 130-2 in theoptical-axis direction.

The second sensor 240 b may be disposed so as to be opposite or tooverlap the third magnet 130-3 in the optical-axis direction.

The first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may be connected tothe terminals of the circuit board 250. For example, driving signals maybe provided to the first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 bthrough the terminals of the circuit board 250, and first output of thefirst sensor 240 a and second output of the second sensor 240 b may beoutput through the terminals of the circuit board 250.

The controller 830 of the camera module 200 or the controller 780 of theterminal 200A may sense or detect the displacement of the OIS movingunit using the first output of the first sensor 240 a and the secondoutput of the second sensor 240 b.

For example, the first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may bedisposed or mounted at the lower surface of the circuit board 250, andmay be disposed in the seating recesses 215-1 and 215-2 of the base 210.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The first sensor 240 a and the second sensor 240 b may sense thedisplacement of the OIS moving unit in a direction perpendicular to theoptical axis OA.

As the result of interaction between the first magnet 130-1 and thethird coil unit 230-1, interaction between the second magnet 130-2 andthe fourth coil unit 230-2, and interaction between the third magnet130-3 and the fifth coil unit 230-3, the OIS moving unit (e.g. thehousing 140) may be moved in a direction perpendicular to the opticalaxis OA, e.g. the X-axis direction and/or the Y-axis direction, wherebyhandshake compensation may be performed.

Next, the cover member 300 will be described.

The cover member 300 may receive the OIS moving unit, the upper elasticmember 150, the lower elastic member 160, the second coil 230, thecircuit board 250, the supporting member 220, and the second positionsensor 240 in a receiving space formed together with the base 210.

The cover member 300 may be formed in the shape of a box, the lowerportion of which is open and which includes an upper plate and sideplates. The lower portion of the cover member 300 may be coupled to theupper portion of the base 210. The shape of the upper plate of the covermember 300 may be polygonal, for example, quadrangular or octagonal.

The cover member 300 may be provided in the upper plate thereof with anopening, through which the lens (not shown) coupled to the bobbin 110 isexposed to external light. The cover member 300 may be made of anonmagnetic material, such as SUS in order to prevent a phenomenon inwhich the magnet 130 attracts the cover member. The cover member 300 maybe made of metal. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Thecover member may be made of plastic. In addition, the cover member 300may be connected to a ground of a second holder 800 of the camera module200. The cover member 300 may block electromagnetic interference (EMI).

FIG. 10A is a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus 100 in an ABdirection of FIG. 3, FIG. 10B is a sectional view of the lens movingapparatus 100 in a CD direction of FIG. 3, FIG. 10C is a sectional viewof the lens moving apparatus 100 in an EF direction of FIG. 3, FIG. 10Dis a sectional view of the lens moving apparatus 100 in a GH directionof FIG. 3, FIG. 11 is a plan view of the second coil 230 of FIG. 9B,FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the first to third magnets 130-1 to130-3, the dummy member 135, and the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3, FIG. 13 is a side view of the components 130-1, 130-3, 230-1,230-3, and 135 shown in FIG. 12, and FIG. 14 is a plan view of thecomponents 130-1, 130-3, 230-1, 230-3, and 135 shown in FIG. 12.

Referring to FIGS. 10A to 14, the first magnet 130-1 and the secondmagnet 130-2 may have the same length, width, and height. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In addition, the third coil unit230-1 and the fourth coil unit 230-2 may have the same length, width,and height. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

Lengths L1, L2, and L3, widths W1, W2, and W3, and heights H1, H2, andH3 of the first magnet 130-1, the second magnet 130-2, and the dummymember 135 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. Inaddition, lengths M1 and M2, widths K1 and K2, and heights (lengths orthicknesses in the optical-axis direction) of the third to fifth coilunits 230-1 to 230-3 will also be described.

Here, the lengths L1 and L2 of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3may be lengths thereof in a longitudinal direction, and the length L3 ofthe dummy member 135 may be a length of the dummy member 135 in thelongitudinal direction. In addition, the widths W1 and W2 of the firstto third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may be lengths thereof in a widthdirection, and the width W3 of the dummy member 135 may be a length ofthe dummy member 135 in the width direction.

Here, the width direction may be perpendicular to the longitudinaldirection, and may be a direction in which the length of each of thecomponents 130-1 to 130-3 and 135 is smaller. In addition, the width ofeach of the components 130-1 to 130-3 and 135 may be referred to as a“thickness” of each of the components 130-1 to 130-3 and 135.

For example, the lengths L1 and L2 of the first to third magnets 130-1to 130-3 may be lengths of the first surfaces of the first to thirdmagnets 130-1 to 130-3 opposite the bobbin 110 in the longitudinaldirection. In addition, the length L3 of the dummy member 135 may be alength of the first surface of the dummy member 135 opposite the bobbin110 in the longitudinal direction.

In addition, for example, the widths W1, W2, and W3 of the first tothird magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and the dummy member 135 may be distancesfrom the first surfaces of the components 130-1 to 130-3 and 135opposite the bobbin 110 to the second surfaces thereof opposite thefirst surfaces.

In addition, for example, the heights H1, H2, and H3 of the first tothird magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and the dummy member 135 may be lengths ofthe components in the optical-axis direction.

In addition, for example, the heights H1, H2, and H3 may be lengths ofthe first surfaces of the components 130-1 to 130-3 and 135 opposite thebobbin 110 in a vertical direction. In addition, for example, theheights H1, H2, and H3 may be distances from the lower surfaces to theupper surfaces of the first surfaces of the components 130-1 to 130-3and 135.

Each of the lengths M1 and M2 of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3 may be a length in the longitudinal direction of a correspondingone of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 or a direction parallelthereto. For example, M1 and M2 may be lengths of the third to fifthcoil units 230-1 to 230-3 in the longitudinal direction, and each of M1and M2 may be a length between outermost ends of each of the third tofifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3.

In addition, each of lengths X1, X2, and Y1 of the third to fifth coilunits 230-1 to 230-3 may be a length between outermost ends of the innerportion (or the inner surface) of each of the third to fifth coil units230-1 to 230-3.

In addition, each of the widths K1 and K2 of the third to fifth coilunits 230-1 to 230-3 may be a length in the width direction of acorresponding one of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 or adirection parallel thereto.

The height of each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 maybe a length in the optical-axis direction, and the heights of the thirdto fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may be the same. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least oneof the heights of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may bedifferent from the others.

The length L1 of the first magnet 130-1 may be less than the lengths M1and X1 of the third coil unit 230-1 (L1<M1, X1). The length W1 of thefirst magnet 130-1 in the width direction may be less than the length K1of the third coil unit 230-1 in the width direction (W1<K1).

In addition, the length of the second magnet 130-2 may be less than thelengths M1 and X2 of the fourth coil unit 230-2. The length of thesecond magnet 130-2 in the width direction may be less than the lengthof the fourth coil unit 230-2 in the width direction.

The length L2 of the third magnet 130-3 may be less than the lengths M2and Y1 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 (L2<M2, Y1). The length W2 of thethird magnet 130-3 in the width direction may be less than the length K2of the fifth coil unit 230-3 in the width direction (W2<K2). In anotherembodiment, W2 and K2 may be equal to each other.

The length M2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 in the longitudinal directionmay be greater than the length M1 of the third coil unit 230-1 in thelongitudinal direction and/or the length of the fourth coil unit 230-2in the longitudinal direction (M2>M1). In addition, the length Y1 of thefifth coil unit 230-3 may be greater than the length X1 of the thirdcoil unit 230-1 and/or the length X2 of the fourth coil unit 230-2(Y1>X1, X2).

In addition, for example, the length X1 of the third coil unit 230-1 andthe length X2 of the fourth coil unit 230-2 may be equal to each other(X1=X2).

The length L2 of the third magnet 130-3 may be greater than the lengthL1 of the first magnet 130-1 and/or the length of the second magnet130-2 (L2>L1).

Since M2>M1 and L2>L1, first electromagnetic force generated by thefifth coil unit 230-3 and the third magnet 130-3 may be greater thansecond electromagnetic force generated by the third coil unit 230-1 andthe first magnet 130-1 and may be greater than third electromagneticforce generated by the fourth coil unit 230-2 and the second magnet130-2. As a result, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the first electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and thesum of the second and third electromagnetic forces in the Y-axisdirection, thereby improving reliability in OIS operation.

In another embodiment, M2=M1 and L2=L1.

For example, L1:L2=1:1 to 1:1.5. In addition, for example, L1:L2=1:1.2to 1:1.4.

In addition, the length K2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 in the widthdirection may be greater than the length K1 of the third coil unit 230-1in the width direction and/or the length of the fourth coil unit 230-2in the width direction (K2>K1). However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, both may be equal to each other.

The length W2 of the first magnet 130-1 in the width direction may begreater than the length W1 of the first magnet 130-1 in the widthdirection and/or the length of the second magnet 130-2 in the widthdirection (W2>W1). However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Inanother embodiment, W2=W1.

For example, W1 may be a length in a direction perpendicular to theoptical axis and one surface of the first magnet 130-1 (or the secondmagnet 130-2), and W2 may be a length in a direction perpendicular tothe optical axis and one surface of the third magnet 130-3.

Since W2>W1, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the first electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and thesum of the second and third electromagnetic forces in the Y-axisdirection, thereby improving reliability in OIS operation.

The height H2 of the third magnet 130-3 may be equal to the height H1 ofthe first magnet 130-1 and/or the height of the second magnet 130-2(H2=H1). Here, H1 and H2 may be lengths of the magnets 130-1 to 130-3 inthe optical-axis direction. Alternatively, H1 may be the distance fromthe lower surface to the upper surface of the first magnet 130-1 (or thesecond magnet 130-2), and H2 may be the distance from the lower surfaceto the upper surface of the third magnet 130-3.

That is, the length of the third magnet 130-3 in the optical-axisdirection may be equal to the length of the first magnet 130-1 in theoptical-axis direction and/or the length of the second magnet 130-2 inthe optical-axis direction.

In addition, for example, the length of the first magnet 130-1 in theoptical-axis direction and the length of the second magnet 130-2 in theoptical-axis direction may be equal to each other.

Referring to FIG. 11, each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3 may have a ring shape having a hole open in the optical-axisdirection.

The length L3 of the dummy member 135 may be less than the length L2 ofthe third magnet 130-3 in the longitudinal direction (L3<L2), and thelength W3 of the dummy member 135 in the width direction may be lessthan the length W2 of the third magnet 130-3 in the width direction(W3<W2).

Since W3<W2, the embodiment is capable of securing a sufficient space inwhich the circuit board 190 and the first position sensor 170 aredisposed, thereby preventing spatial interference between the circuitboard 190 and the first position sensor 170 and the dummy member 135.

In another embodiment, W3=W2, and L2=L3.

In addition, a first distance between the first magnet 130-1 and thethird coil unit 230-1 in the optical-axis direction, a second distancebetween the second magnet 130-2 and the fourth coil unit 230-2 in theoptical-axis direction, and a third distance between the third magnet130-3 and the fifth coil unit 230-2 in the optical-axis direction may beequal to each other. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In another embodiment, the third distance may be less than the firstdistance and/or the second distance. Since the third distance is lessthan the first distance and/or the second distance, it is possible tofurther reduce the difference between the electromagnetic forcegenerated in the X-axis direction and the electromagnetic forcegenerated in the Y-axis direction, compared to the case in which thefirst to third distances are equal to each other.

The height H3 of the dummy member 135 may be less than or equal to theheight H2 of the third magnet 130-3. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, the height H3 of the dummymember 135 may be greater than the height H2 of the third magnet 130-3.

Referring to FIG. 10A, for example, the height of the upper surface ofthe dummy member 135 disposed at the housing 140 may be less than theheight of the upper surface of the position sensor 170 and may begreater than the height of the lower surface of the position sensor 170.Alternatively, the height of the upper surface of the dummy member 135may be less than or equal to the height of the lower surface of theposition sensor 170.

For example, at the initial position of the bobbin 110, the height ofthe upper surface of the dummy member 135 disposed at the housing 140may be less than the height of the upper surface of the sensing magnet180 and may be greater than the height of the lower surface of thesensing magnet 180. Alternatively, at the initial position of the bobbin110, the height of the upper surface of the dummy member 135 may be lessthan or equal to the height of the lower surface of the sensing magnet180.

For example, the height of the upper surface of the dummy member 135 maybe less than the height of the upper surface of the third magnet 130-3.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,the height of the upper surface of the dummy member 135 may be greaterthan or equal to the height of the upper surface of the third magnet130-3.

The height of the lower surface of the dummy member 135 may be less thanthe height of the lower surface of the third magnet 130-3. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the height ofthe lower surface of the dummy member 135 may be greater than or equalto the height of the lower surface of the third magnet 130-3.

Referring to FIG. 10C, the height of the upper surface of the dummymember 135 may be less than the height of the upper surface of thesecond magnet 130-2 (or the first magnet 130-1). However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the height of the uppersurface of the dummy member 135 may be greater than or equal to theheight of the upper surface of the second magnet 130-2 (or the firstmagnet 130-1).

In addition, the height of the lower surface of the dummy member 135 maybe less than the height of the lower surface of the second magnet 130-2(or the first magnet 130-1). However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, the height of the lower surface of thedummy member 135 may be greater than or equal to the height of the lowersurface of the second magnet 130-2 (or the first magnet 130-1).

Embodiments include three magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and three coil units230-1 to 230-3 for OIS corresponding thereto in order to reduce magneticfield interference between magnets included in adjacent lens movingapparatuses of a dual or more camera module.

Two 130-1 and 130-2 of the three magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may perform theAF operation based on interaction with the first and second coil units120-1 and 120-2 and at the same time may perform the OIS operation inthe Y-axis direction based on interaction with the third and fourth coilunits 230-1 and 230-2.

The other 130-3 of the three magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may perform only theOIS operation in the X-axis direction based on interaction with thefifth coil unit 230-3.

Since the dummy member 135 is disposed opposite the third magnet 130-3,the embodiment is capable of preventing oscillation due to weighteccentricity at the time of the OIS operation.

Each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 may be a monopolarmagnetized magnet having a single N pole and a single S pole. Forexample, each of the first and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2 may bedisposed such that a first surface thereof opposite the first coil 120(or the outer surface of the bobbin 110) has an N pole and a secondsurface thereof opposite the first surface has an S pole. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. Each magnet may be disposed so as tohave reverse poles. The positions of the S poles and the N poles of thefirst and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2 may be set such thatelectromagnetic force due to interaction therebetween is generatedaccording to disposition of the first coil 120.

In addition, for example, the third magnet 130-3 may be disposed suchthat a first surface thereof opposite the outer surface of the bobbin110 has an N pole and a second surface thereof opposite the firstsurface has an S pole. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.The magnet may be disposed so as to have reverse poles.

Alternatively, in another embodiment, each of the third magnets 130-1 to130-3 may be configured such that the N pole and the S pole are arrangedin the optical-axis direction.

FIG. 15 shows first to third magnets 130-1 a, 130-2 a, and 130-3 aaccording to another embodiment. Reference numerals of FIG. 15 identicalto those of FIG. 12 indicate the same components, and a description ofthe same components will be briefly given or omitted.

Referring to FIG. 15, the first magnet 130-1 a may include a firstmagnet portion 11 a, a second magnet portion 11 b, and a first partition11 c disposed between the first magnet portion 11 a and the secondmagnet portion 11 b.

The second magnet 130-2 a may include a third magnet portion 12 a, afourth magnet portion 12 b, and a second partition 12 c disposed betweenthe third magnet portion 12 a and the fourth magnet portion 12 b.

The third magnet 130-3 a may include a fifth magnet portion 13 a, asixth magnet portion 13 b, and a third partition 13 c disposed betweenthe fifth magnet portion 13 a and the sixth magnet portion 13 b. Here,the first partition 11 c may be referred to as a “first nonmagneticpartition,” the second partition 12 c may be referred to as a “secondnonmagnetic partition,” and the third partition 13 c may be referred toas a “third nonmagnetic partition.”

For example, the first magnet portion 11 a and the second magnet portion11 b may be spaced apart from each other in the optical-axis direction,the third magnet portion 12 a and the fourth magnet portion 12 b may bespaced apart from each other in the optical-axis direction, and thefifth magnet portion 13 a and the sixth magnet portion 13 b may bespaced apart from each other in the optical-axis direction.

The first magnet portion 11 a may include an N pole, an S pole, and afirst boundary surface 21 a between the N pole and the S pole, and thesecond magnet portion 11 b may include an N pole, an S pole, and asecond boundary surface 21 b between the N pole and the S pole.

In addition, each of the third magnet portion 12 a and the fourth magnetportion 12 b may include an N pole, an S pole, and a boundary surfacebetween the N pole and the S pole. In addition, each of the fifth magnetportion 13 a and the sixth magnet portion 13 b may include an N pole, anS pole, and a boundary surface between the N pole and the S pole.

The first boundary surface 21 a may be a portion having substantially nomagnetism, may include a section having little polarity, and may be aportion that is naturally generated in order to form a magnet consistingof an N pole and an S pole.

The first partition 11 c may be a portion that separates or isolates thefirst magnet portion 11 a and the second magnet portion 11 b from eachother and that has substantially no magnetism, and may be a portionhaving little polarity. For example, the first partition 11 c may be anonmagnetic material or air. The partition may be referred to as a“neutral zone.”

The first partition 11 c is a portion that is artificially formed whenthe first magnet portion 11 a and the second magnet portion 11 b aremagnetized. The width W11 of the first partition 11 c may be greaterthan the width of each of the first boundary surface 21 a and the secondboundary surface 21 b.

Here, the width W11 of the first partition 11 c may be the length of thenonmagnetic partition 11 c in a direction from the first magnet portion11 a to the second magnet portion 11 b. Alternatively, the width W11 ofthe first partition 11 c may be the length of the first partition 11 cin the optical-axis direction.

For example, the width W11 of the first partition 11 c may be 0.2 mm to0.5 mm. Alternatively, the width W11 of the first partition 11 c may be0.3 mm to 0.4 mm.

The first magnet portion 11 a and the second magnet portion 11 b may bedisposed such that opposite poles are opposite each other in theoptical-axis direction.

For example, the N pole of the first magnet portion 11 a and the S poleof the second magnet portion 11 b may be disposed so as to be oppositethe first coil unit 120-1. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. Reverse disposition is possible.

A description of the boundary surfaces 21 a and 21 b of the first andsecond magnet portions 11 a and 11 b may be applied to a boundarysurface of each of the third to sixth magnet portions 12 a, 12 b, 13 a,and 13 b. In addition, a description of the first partition 11 c may beapplied to the second and third partitions 12 c and 13 c.

Each of the first to third partitions 11 c, 12 c, and 13 c may extend ina horizontal direction or a direction perpendicular to the optical axis.

The first magnet portion 11 a, the first partition 11 c, and the secondmagnet portion 11 b may be sequentially disposed in the optical-axisdirection. The third magnet portion 12 a, the second partition 12 c, andthe fourth magnet portion 12 b may be sequentially disposed in theoptical-axis direction. In addition, the fifth magnet portion 13 a, thethird partition 13 c, and the sixth magnet portion 13 b may besequentially disposed in the optical-axis direction.

For example, the first magnet portion 11 a may be disposed on the firstpartition 11 c, and the second magnet portion 11 b may be disposed underthe first partition 11 c. In addition, the third magnet portion 12 a maybe disposed on the second partition 12 c, and the fourth magnet portion12 b may be disposed under the second partition 12 c. The fifth magnetportion 13 a may be disposed on the third partition 13 c, and the sixthmagnet portion 13 b may be disposed under the third partition 13 c.

For example, each of the first to third partitions 11 c, 12 c, and 13 cmay be parallel to a straight line perpendicular to the optical axis,and the boundary surface 21 a or 21 b of each of the first to sixthmagnet portions 11 a, 11 b, 12 a, 12 b, 13 a, and 13 b may be parallelto the optical axis.

For example, in each of the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3, an Npole and an S pole in the form of bipolar magnetization may be disposedin the optical-axis direction.

The first magnet 130-1 a may be located inside a region of the thirdcoil unit 230-1, and may overlap the third coil unit 230-1 in theoptical-axis direction.

The second magnet 130-2 a may be located inside a region of the fourthcoil unit 230-2, and may overlap the fourth coil unit 230-2 in theoptical-axis direction.

The third magnet 130-3 a may be located inside a region of the fifthcoil unit 230-3, and may overlap the fifth coil unit 230-3 in theoptical-axis direction.

A portion of the third coil unit 230-1 may simultaneously overlap afirst polar portion of the first magnet portion 11 a, the firstpartition 11 c, and a second polar portion of the second magnet portion11 b in the optical-axis direction. Here, the first polar portion may bean N pole or an S pole, and the second polar portion may be a polarportion having polarity opposite the polarity of the first polarportion.

A portion of the fourth coil unit 230-2 may simultaneously overlap afirst polar portion of the third magnet portion 12 a, the secondpartition 12 c, and a second polar portion of the fourth magnet portion12 b in the optical-axis direction.

A portion of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may simultaneously overlap afirst polar portion of the fifth magnet portion 13 a, the thirdpartition 13 c, and a second polar portion of the sixth magnet portion13 b in the optical-axis direction.

In another embodiment, each of the first and second magnets may be themonopolar magnetized magnet of FIG. 12, and the third magnet may be thebipolar magnetized magnet of FIG. 15.

FIG. 16A shows first to third magnets 130-1 a, 130-2 a, and 130-3 baccording to a further embodiment, FIG. 16B is a side view of thecomponents shown in FIG. 16A, FIG. 16C is a plan view of the first tothird magnets 130-1 a, 130-2 a, and 130-3 b of FIG. 16A and the third tofifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3, FIG. 16D is a sectional view of a lensmoving apparatus including the third magnet 130-3 b of FIG. 16A in theCD direction, and FIG. 16E shows a line of magnetic force of the thirdmagnet 130-3 b of FIG. 16A with respect to the fifth coil unit 230-3 anda line of magnetic force of the first magnet 130-1 a with respect to thethird coil unit 230-1.

Reference numerals of FIG. 16A identical to those of FIG. 15 indicatethe components, and a description of the same components will be brieflygiven or omitted.

Referring to FIGS. 16A to 16E, the third magnet 130-3 b may include afifth magnet portion 1013 a, a sixth magnet portion 1013 b, and a thirdpartition 1013 c disposed between the fifth magnet portion 1013 a andthe sixth magnet portion 1013 b.

Definition of the boundary surfaces 21 a and 21 b may be applied to aboundary surface 22 a of the fifth magnet portion 1013 a and a boundarysurface 22 b of the sixth magnet portion 1013 b. The third partition1013 c is a portion that is artificially formed when the fifth magnetportion 1013 a and the sixth magnet portion 1013 b are magnetized. Thewidth W12 of the third partition 1013 c may be greater than the width ofeach of the boundary surfaces 22 a and 22 b. Here, the width W12 of thethird partition 1013 c may be the length of the third partition 1013 cin a direction from the fifth magnet portion 1013 a to the sixth magnetportion 1013 b.

For example, the width W12 of the third partition 1013 c may be 0.2 mmto 0.5 mm. Alternatively, the width W12 of the third partition 1013 cmay be 0.3 mm to 0.4 mm.

The fifth magnet portion 1013 a and the sixth magnet portion 1013 b maybe disposed such that opposite poles are opposite each other in adirection that is perpendicular to the optical axis OA and faces thethird magnet 130-3 b from the optical axis OA.

For example, an N pole and an S pole of the sixth magnet portion 1013 bmay be disposed so as to be opposite the outer surface of the bobbin 110corresponding to the third side portion 141-3 of the housing 140.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Reverse disposition ispossible.

The third partition 1013 c may extend in the optical-axis direction orthe vertical direction.

The fifth magnet portion 1013 a, the third partition 1013 c, and thesixth magnet portion 1013 b may be sequentially disposed in a directionthat is perpendicular to the optical axis OA and in a direction from thethird magnet 130-3 b to the optical axis OA.

For example, the fifth magnet portion 1013 a may be disposed on the left(or the right) of the third partition 1013 c, and the sixth magnetportion 1013 b may be disposed on the right (or the left) of the thirdpartition 1013 c.

For example, the third partition 1013 c may be parallel to the opticalaxis, and the boundary surfaces 22 a and 22 b of the fifth and sixthmagnet portions 1013 a and 1013 b may be parallel to a direction that isperpendicular to the optical axis.

A separation or isolation direction of the third partition 1013 c may beperpendicular to a separation or isolation direction of each of thefirst and second partitions 1011 c and 1012 c.

The length W21 of the third magnet 130-3 b in the width direction may begreater than the length W1 of the first magnet 130-1 a in the widthdirection and/or the length of the second magnet 130-2 in the widthdirection (W21>W1). Since W21>W1, the embodiment is capable of reducingthe difference between the first electromagnetic force in the X-axisdirection and the sum of the second and third electromagnetic forces inthe Y-axis direction, thereby improving reliability in OIS operation.

The height H21 of the third magnet 130-3 b may be less than the heightH1 of the first magnet 130-1 a and/or the height of the second magnet130-2 a (H21<H1).

That is, the length of the third magnet 130-3 b in the optical-axisdirection may be less than the length of the first magnet 130-1 a in theoptical-axis direction and/or the length of the second magnet 130-2 a inthe optical-axis direction.

According to the direction of the line of magnetic force of the thirdmagnet 130-3 b shown in FIG. 16E, magnetic flux provided from the thirdmagnet 130-3 b to the fifth coil unit 230-3 is not greatly reduced eventhough the height H21 of the third magnet 130-3 b is reduced (e.g.H21<H1). As a result, the decrement of electromagnetic force generatedby the third magnet 130-3 b and the fifth coil unit 230-3 is too smallto affect the OIS operation.

Since H21<H1, the embodiment is capable of reducing the weight of thelens moving apparatus, thereby reducing power consumption for AF drivingand/or OIS driving. In another embodiment, H21=H1.

In addition, for example, the height of the upper surface of the thirdmagnet 130-3 b may be greater than or equal to the height of a boundaryline between the second magnet portion 11 b and the first partition 11 cof the first magnet 130-1 a, and may be less than or equal to the heightof the upper surface of the first magnet portion 11 a.

In addition, for example, H21:H1=0.3:1 to 1:1. In the case in whichH21/H1 is less than 0.3, the first electromagnetic force generated bythe fifth coil unit 230-3 and the third magnet 130-3 b may beexcessively reduced, whereby the difference between the electromagneticforce in the X-axis direction and the electromagnetic force in theY-axis direction may be increased, and therefore reliability in OISdriving may be deteriorated.

In the case in which H21/H1 is greater than 1, the first electromagneticforce in the X-axis direction may be increased, whereby the differencebetween the electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and theelectromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction may be increased, andtherefore reliability in OIS driving may be deteriorated.

Alternatively, for example, H21:H1=0.5:1 to 0.8:1.

Referring to FIG. 16C, each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3 may have a ring shape having a hole open in the optical-axisdirection.

The length R1 of the hole of the fifth coil unit 230-3 in a directionperpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the fifth coil unit 230-3may be less than the length R2 of the hole of the third coil unit 230-1in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the thirdcoil unit 230-1 (R1<R2). In addition, R1 may be less than the length ofthe hole of the fourth coil unit 230-2 in a direction perpendicular tothe longitudinal direction of the fourth coil unit 230-2.

Since the first magnet 130-1 a and the third magnet 130-3 b aredifferent in magnetization direction from each other, both havedifferent distributions in the line of the magnetic force. In the casein which setting is performed such that R2>R1 in consideration ofdifferent distributions in the line of the magnetic force, it ispossible to increase the electromagnetic force between the first magnet130-1 a and the third coil unit 230-1, the electromagnetic force betweenthe second magnet 130-2 a and the fourth coil unit 230-2, and theelectromagnetic force between the third magnet 130-3 b and the fifthcoil unit 230-3.

In addition, the number of windings of a coil at the fifth coil unit230-3 (hereinafter referred to as a “first number of windings”) may begreater than the number of windings of a coil at the third coil unit230-1 (hereinafter referred to as a “second number of windings”) and/orthe number of windings of a coil at the fourth coil unit 230-2(hereinafter referred to as a “third number of windings”), whereby thedifference between the electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction andthe electromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction may be reduced.

In addition, for example, the second number of windings and the thirdnumber of windings may be equal to each other. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the first number ofwindings and the second number of windings (or the third number ofwindings) may be equal to each other.

Referring to FIG. 16D, the height of the upper surface of the dummymember 135 may be greater than or equal to the height of the uppersurface of the third magnet 130-3 b. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, the height of the upper surfaceof the dummy member 135 may be less than the height of the upper surfaceof the third magnet 130-3 b.

The height of the lower surface of the dummy member 135 may be less thanthe height of the lower surface of the third magnet 130-3 b. However,the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the heightof the lower surface of the dummy member 135 may be greater than theheight of the lower surface of the third magnet 130-3 b.

In addition, the height of the upper surface of the dummy member 135 maybe less than the height of the upper surface of the second magnet 130-2a (or the first magnet 130-1 a), and may be greater than the height ofthe lower surface of the second magnet 130-2 a (or the first magnet130-1 a).

In addition, the height of the lower surface of the dummy member 135 maybe less than the height of the lower surface of the second magnet 130-2a (or the first magnet 130-1 a). However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, the height of the lower surface of thedummy member 135 may be greater than the height of the lower surface ofthe second magnet 130-2 a (or the first magnet 130-1 a).

Embodiments include three magnets 130-1 a, 130-2 a, and 130-3 b andthree coil units 230-1 to 230-3 for OIS corresponding thereto in orderto reduce magnetic field interference between magnets included inadjacent lens moving apparatuses of a dual or more camera module.

Each of the first and second magnets 130-1 a and 130-2 a may have amagnetization direction in which the two magnet portions 11 a and 11 bor 12 a and 12 b are disposed above and below the partition 11 c or 12c. In addition, the first and second parts 3 a and 3 b of each of thefirst and second coil units 120-1 and 120-2 may be disposed so as to beopposite the two magnet portions 11 a and 11 b or 12 a and 12 b. In thisdisposition, it is possible to increase the electromagnetic forcebetween the first magnet 130-1 a and the first coil unit 120-1 and theelectromagnetic force between the second magnet 130-2 a and the secondcoil unit 120-2, thereby reducing current consumption.

In general, electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction by interactionbetween one magnet and one coil unit is less than electromagnetic forcein the Y-axis direction by interaction between two magnets and two coilunits. The difference between the electromagnetic force in the X-axisdirection and the electromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction maycause malfunction in OIS driving.

Embodiments may be configured as follows in order to reduce thedifference between the electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction andthe electromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction.

The magnetization direction of the two magnet portions 1013 a and 1013 bof the third magnet 130-3 b is formed so as to be perpendicular to themagnetization direction of the two magnet portions 11 a and 11 b or 12 aand 12 b of each of the first and second magnets 130-1 a and 130-2 a.

For example, the third magnet 130-3 b may be disposed on the fifth coilunit 230-3 such that the third partition 1013 c, which separates the twomagnet portions 1013 a and 1013 b of the third magnet 130-3 b from eachother, is perpendicular to the fifth coil unit 230-3.

For example, the third magnet 130-3 b may be disposed such that thethird partition 1013 c is parallel to the optical-axis direction.

Alternatively, for example, the third magnet 130-3 b may be disposedsuch that the N pole of one of the two magnet portions 1013 a and 1013 bof the third magnet 130-3 b and the S pole of the other are opposite thefifth coil unit 230-3 in the optical-axis direction.

On the other hand, the first magnet 130-1 a may be disposed on the thirdcoil unit 230-1 such that the first partition 11 c is parallel to thethird coil unit 230-1, and the second magnet 130-2 a may be disposed onthe fourth coil unit 230-2 such that the second partition 12 c isparallel to the fourth coil unit 230-2.

In addition, for example, the first and second magnets 130-1 a and 130-2a may be disposed such that the first partition 11 c and the secondpartition 12 c are parallel to the optical-axis direction.

Alternatively, for example, both the N pole and the S pole of one of thetwo magnet portions 11 a and 11 b of the first magnet 130-1 a may beopposite the third coil unit 230-1 in the optical-axis direction, andboth the N pole and the S pole of one of the two magnet portions 12 aand 12 b of the second magnet 130-2 a may be opposite the fourth coilunit 230-2 in the optical-axis direction.

In addition, the length L2 of the third magnet 130-3 b may be greaterthan the length L1 of the first magnet 130-1 a and/or the length of thesecond magnet 130-2 a, and the length M2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 inthe longitudinal direction may be greater than the length M1 of thethird coil unit 230-1 and/or the length of the fourth coil unit 230-2.As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between theelectromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and the electromagneticforce in the Y-axis direction.

Referring to FIG. 16D, the line of magnetic force of the third magnet130-3 b with respect to the fifth coil unit 230-3 is different indirection from the line of magnetic force of the first magnet 130-1 awith respect to the third coil unit 230-1.

Since the disposition of the second magnet 130-2 a is identical orsimilar to the disposition of the first magnet 130-1 a, the line ofmagnetic force of the second magnet 130-2 a with respect to the fourthcoil unit 230-2 may be identical or similar to the line of magneticforce of the first magnet 130-1 a with respect to the third coil unit230-1.

First electromagnetic force generated by the line of magnetic force MF2of the fifth coil unit 230-3 and the third magnet 130-3 b may be greaterthan second electromagnetic force generated by the line of magneticforce MF1 of the third coil unit 230-1 and the first magnet 130-1 a.

In addition, the first electromagnetic force generated by the line ofmagnetic force MF2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 and the third magnet130-3 b may be greater than third electromagnetic force generated by theline of magnetic force MF1 of the fourth coil unit 230-2 and the secondmagnet 130-2 a.

Since the first electromagnetic force is greater than each of the secondelectromagnetic force and the third electromagnetic force, a design maybe made such that the sum of the second electromagnetic force and thethird electromagnetic force is almost equal to the first electromagneticforce. Therefore, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and theelectromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction at the time of OISdriving.

FIG. 16F shows simulation results of electromagnetic force Fy in theY-axis direction due to interaction between the first and second magnets130-1 a and 130-2 a and the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2shown in FIG. 16A and electromagnetic force Fx in the X-axis directiondue to interaction between the third magnet 130-3 b and the fifth coilunit 230-3. FIG. 16F also shows linearity in the X-axis direction andlinearity in the Y-axis direction.

In FIG. 16F, the resistance of each of the third to fifth coil units230-1 to 230-3 may be 6 ohm [Ω] to 8 ohm. Each of the first to thirdmagnets 130-1 a to 130-3 b may be an N45H or N45SH magnet to an N50H orN50SH magnet. In the simulation of FIG. 16F, each of the first to thirdmagnets 130-1 a to 130-3 b is an N48H magnet.

Referring to FIG. 16F, the ratio of Fx to Fy (Fx/Fy) is 0.88 to 1. Thatis, it can be seen that a deviation between Fx and Fy is less than 12%.Based on the simulation results, the embodiment is capable of reducingthe difference between the electromagnetic force in the X-axis directionand the electromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction at the time of OISdriving, thereby securing reliability in OIS driving.

In addition, when each of a stroke in the X-axis direction and a strokein the Y-axis direction has a range of −150 μm to 150 μm, each oflinearity in the X-axis direction and linearity in the Y-axis directionis 10 nm or less, which is satisfactory. The linearity in the X-axisdirection may mean a deviation between a trend line of the stroke in theX-axis direction and the stroke in the X-axis direction. The linearityin the Y-axis direction may mean a deviation between a trend line of thestroke in the Y-axis direction and the stroke in the Y-axis direction.In the simulation, the trend line of the stroke in the X-axis directionis y=0.0015x+0.003, and the trend line of the stroke in the Y-axisdirection is y=0.0018x−7E−0.6. It is assumed that the stiffness of eachof the upper elastic member 150 and the lower elastic member 160 is 70mN/mm and the weight of a lens mounted in the bobbin 110 is 150 mg.

Meanwhile, the lens moving apparatus 100 according to the aboveembodiment may further include a lens and/or a lens barrel mounted inthe bobbin 110. In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100 according tothe embodiment may further include an image sensor. In addition, thelens moving apparatus 100 may further include a circuit board on whichthe image sensor is mounted. In addition, the lens moving apparatus 100may further include a filter configured to filter light passing throughthe lens and to provide the filtered light to the image sensor. Inaddition, the lens moving apparatus 100 may further include a motionsensor or a controller.

FIG. 17A is a sectional view of a first dotted-line part 60A of thethird coil unit 230-1 of FIG. 11, FIG. 17B shows first and second vias55 a and 55 b of the third coil unit 230-1, FIG. 18A is a sectional viewof a second dotted-line part 60B of the fifth coil unit 230-3 of FIG.11, and FIG. 18B shows first and second vias 56 a and 56 b of the fifthcoil unit 230-3. A description of the third coil unit 230-1 of FIG. 17may be applied to the structure and shape of the fourth coil unit 230-2.

Referring to FIGS. 11 and 17A to 18B, the second coil 230 may be formedon the board 231, and the board 231 may include a first side 23 a and asecond side 23 b opposite each other, a third side 23 c and a fourthside 23 d opposite each other, and an opening 231 a.

The third coil unit 230-1 may be disposed in a first region Re1 locatedbetween the first side 23 a of the circuit member 231 and the opening231 a of the circuit member 231, and may have a first number of turns(or a first number of windings).

The fourth coil unit 230-2 may be disposed in a second region Re2located between the second side 23 b of the circuit member 231 and theopening 231 a of the circuit member 231, and may have a second number ofturns (or a second number of windings).

The fifth coil unit 230-3 may be disposed in a third region Re3 locatedbetween the third side 23 b of the circuit member 231 and the opening231 a of the circuit member 231, and may have a third number of turns(or a third number of windings). Here, each of the first to fourth sides23 a to 23 d of the circuit member 231 may correspond to one of thefirst to fourth side portions 141-1 to 14104 of the housing 140.

Referring to FIG. 17A, the third coil unit 230-1 may include a firstline having a plurality of turns.

The third coil unit 230-1 may have a first pattern PA1 having acontinuous spiral, oval, and/or track shape.

The fourth coil unit 230-2 may have the same shape as the third coilunit 230-1. That is, the fourth coil unit 230-2 may include a secondline having a plurality of turns.

For example, the fourth coil unit 230-2 may have a second pattern havinga continuous spiral and/or track shape. For example, the second patternmay be identical to the first pattern PA1.

Referring to FIG. 18A, the fifth coil unit 230-3 may include a thirdline having a plurality of turns.

For example, the fifth coil unit 230-3 may have a third pattern PA2having a continuous spiral and/or track shape.

The first pattern PA1 may be formed in the first region Re1 of the board231, the second pattern may be formed in the second region Re2 of theboard 231, and the third pattern PA2 may be formed in the third regionRe3 of the board 231.

For example, each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 may be madeof a conductor. For example, each of the first to third patterns PA1 andPA2 may be made of a conductive metal, such as copper, gold, aluminum,silver, or an alloy including at least one thereof.

The width A2 of the third line of the fifth coil unit 230-3 is less thanthe width A1 of the first line of the third coil unit 230-1 and thewidth A1 of the second line of the fourth coil unit 230-2.

For example, the width A2 (or the line width) of the third pattern PA2of the fifth coil unit 230-3 is less than the width A1 (or the linewidth) of the first pattern PA1 of the third coil unit 230-1 and thewidth A1 (or the line width) of the second pattern of the fourth coilunit 230-2 (A2<A1).

Here, the width of each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 maybe a length of each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 in thewidth direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction thereof.

The width of the first line of the third coil unit 230-1 and the widthof the second line of the fourth coil unit 230-2 may be equal to eachother. For example, the width A1 of the first pattern PA1 of the thirdcoil unit 230-1 and the width of the second pattern of the fourth coilunit 230-2 may be equal to each other.

The ratio of A2 to A1 (A2:A1) may be 1:1.2 to 1:2.

In the case in which the value obtained by dividing A1 by A2 (A1/A2) isless than 1.2, the difference between the number of turns of the fifthcoil unit 230-3 and the number of turns of the third coil unit 230-1 (orthe fourth coil unit 230-2) is reduced, whereby it is not possible toreduce the difference between the electromagnetic force in the Y-axisdirection due to interaction between the first and second magnets 130-1and 130-2 and the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2 and theelectromagnetic force in the X-axis direction due to interaction betweenthe third magnet 130-3 and the fifth coil unit 230-3, and thereforereliability in OIS driving may be deteriorated.

In the case in which the value obtained by dividing A1 by A2 (A1/A2) isgreater than 2, resistance of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may beincreased, whereby power consumption may be increased, or the magnitudeof a driving signal of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may be increased.

For example, the ratio of A2 to A1 (A2:A1) may be 1:1.25 to 1:1.5.

For example, the width A1 of each of the first and second patterns PA1may be 24 μm to 30 μm, and the width A2 of the third pattern PA2 may be15 μm to 20 μm.

The height (or the thickness) of the third coil unit 230-1 and theheight (or the thickness) of the fourth coil unit 230-2 may be equal toeach other. For example, the height of the first pattern PA1 and theheight T1 of the second pattern may be equal to each other.

In addition, the height T2 (or the thickness) of the third pattern PA2may be equal to the height T1 (or the thickness) of each of the firstand second patterns PA1 (T2=T1). For example, T2=T1=45 μm to 50 μm.Here, T1 may be the length of each of the first and second patterns PA1in the optical-axis direction, and T2 may be length of the third patternPA2 in the optical-axis direction.

The width of each of the lines of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to230-3 may be less than the height (or the thickness) of each of thethird to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3.

The widths A1 and A2 of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 may beless than the heights T1 and T2 (or the thicknesses) of the first tothird patterns PA1 and PA2 (A1, A2<T1, T2)

FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrate that each of the third to fifth coil units230-1 to 230-3 has a dual layer structure. However, the disclosure isnot limited thereto. In another embodiment, each of the third to fifthcoil units 230-1 to 230-3 may have a single layer structure or a tripleor more layer structure.

For example, each of the first pattern PA1 of the third coil unit 230-1and the second pattern of the fourth coil unit 230-2 may be a spiralpattern having a first number of turns.

Each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may include a firstlayer Layer11 or Layer21 and a second layer Layer12 or Layer22 disposedon the first layer Layer11 or Layer21.

For example, each of the first and second patterns PA1 may include afirst layer Layer11 having a continuous spiral, oval, and/or track shapeand a second layer Layer12 disposed on the first layer Layer11, thesecond layer having a continuous spiral, oval, and/or track shape.

In addition, for example, the third pattern PA2 of the fifth coil unit230-3 may be a spiral pattern having a second number of turns greaterthan the first number of turns.

For example, the third pattern PA2 may include a first layer Layer21having a continuous spiral, oval, and/or track shape and a second layerLayer22 disposed on the first layer Layer21, the second layer having acontinuous spiral, oval, and/or track shape.

The width of the third line of each of the first and second layersLayer21 and Layer22 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may be less than thewidth of the first line of each of the first and second layers of thethird coil unit 230-1 and the width of the second line of each of thefirst and second layers of the fourth coil unit 230-2.

The width A2 of each of the first and second layers Layer21 and Layer22of the third pattern PA2 is less than the width of each of the first andsecond layers Layer11 and Layer12 of each of the first and secondpatterns PA1.

The third coil unit 230-1 may include a plurality of lines arranged inthe first region Re1 in a direction from the first side 23 a to thesecond side 23 b or in a direction from the third coil unit 230-1 to thefourth coil unit 230-2.

The first layer Layer11 of the first pattern PA1 may include a pluralityof first lines R1 to Rn arranged in the first region Re1 in thedirection from the first side 23 a to the second side 23 b or in thedirection from the third coil unit 230-1 to the fourth coil unit 230-2.

In addition, the second layer Layer12 of the first pattern PA1 mayinclude a plurality of second lines Q1 to Qn arranged in the firstregion Re1 in the direction from the first side 23 a to the second side23 b or in the direction from the third coil unit 230-1 to the fourthcoil unit 230-2.

The fourth coil unit 230-2 may include a plurality of lines arranged inthe first region Re1 in a direction from the first side 23 a to thesecond side 23 b or in a direction from the third coil unit 230-1 to thefourth coil unit 230-2.

The first layer and the second layer of the second pattern may includepluralities of lines (e.g. R1 to Rn and Q1 to Qn) arranged in the secondregion Re2 in the direction from the first side 23 a to the second side23 b of the board 231 or in the direction from the third coil unit 230-1to the fourth coil unit 230-2.

The fifth coil unit 230-3 may include a plurality of lines arranged inthe third region Re3 in a direction from the third side 23 c to thefourth side 23 d or in a direction perpendicular to the direction fromthe third coil unit 230-1 to the fourth coil unit 230-2.

In addition, the first layer Layer21 of the third pattern PA2 mayinclude a plurality of first lines S1 to Sm arranged in the third regionRe3 in the direction from the third side 23 c to the fourth side 23 d orin the direction perpendicular to the direction from the third coil unit230-1 to the fourth coil unit 230-2.

The second layer Layer22 of the third pattern PA2 may include aplurality of second lines P1 to Pm arranged in the third region Re3 inthe direction from the third side 23 c to the fourth side 23 d or in thedirection perpendicular to the direction from the third coil unit 230-1to the fourth coil unit 230-2. The “lines” may be referred to as“conductive lines” or “coil pattern lines.”

For example, the second lines Q1 to Qn or P1 to Pm of each of the firstto third patterns PA1 and PA2 may be disposed on the first lines R1 toRn or S1 to Sm.

The width of each of the first lines R1 to Rn and S1 to Sm may begreater than the distance between the first lines R1 to Rn and S1 to Sm,and the width of each of the second lines Q1 to Qn and P1 to Pm may begreater than the distance between the second lines Q1 to Qn and P1 toPm.

For example, the width of each of the first lines R1 to Rn and S1 to Smmay be greater than the shortest distance between the first lines R1 toRn and S1 to Sm, and the width of each of the second lines Q1 to Qn andP1 to Pm may be greater than the shortest distance between the secondlines Q1 to Qn and P1 to Pm.

For example, the number of the first lines R1 to Rn (n>1, n being anatural number) and the number of the second lines Q1 to Qn (n>1, nbeing a natural number) of each of the first and second patterns PA1 maybe equal to each other.

In addition, for example, the first lines R1 to Rn (n>1, n being anatural number) and the second lines Q1 to Qn (n>1, n being a naturalnumber) may be aligned with each other or may overlap each other in theoptical-axis direction. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

For example, the number of the first lines S1 to Sm (m>n>1, m being anatural number) and the number of the second lines P1 to Pm (m>n>1, mbeing a natural number) of the third pattern PA2 may be equal to eachother. In addition, for example, the first lines S1 to Sm (m>n>1, mbeing a natural number) and the second lines P1 to Pm (m>n>1, m being anatural number) of the third pattern PA2 may be aligned with each otheror may overlap each other in the optical-axis direction. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto.

The distance B1 between the first lines R1 to Rn of each of the firstand second patterns PA1 is less than the width A1 of each of the firstlines R1 to Rn (B1<A1). In addition, the distance B1 between the secondlines Q1 to Qn of each of the first and second patterns PA1 is less thanthe width A1 of each of the second lines Q1 to Qn (B1<A1).

The distance B1 between the first lines S1 to Sm of the third patternPA2 is less than the width A2 of each of the first lines S1 to Sm(B1<A2). In addition, the distance B1 between the second lines P1 to Pmis less than the width A2 of each of the second lines P1 to Pm (B1<A2).For example, B1 may be 10 μm to 13 μm.

The width of each of the first lines R1 to Rn and the width of each ofthe second lines Q1 to Qn of each of the first and second patterns PA1may be equal to each other. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, the width of each of the first lines R1to Rn and the width of each of the second lines Q1 to Qn may bedifferent from each other.

The width of each of the first lines S1 to Sm and the width of each ofthe second lines P1 to Pm of third pattern PA2 may be equal to eachother. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, the width of each of the first lines S1 to Sm and the widthof each of the second lines P1 to Pm may be different from each other.

The width of each of the first lines S1 to Sm of third pattern PA2 maybe less than the width of each of the first lines R1 to Rn and the widthof each of the second lines Q1 to Qn of each of the first and secondpatterns PA1.

The width of each of the second lines P1 to Pm of third pattern PA2 maybe less than the width of each of the first lines R1 to Rn and the widthof each of the second lines Q1 to Qn of each of the first and secondpatterns PA1.

For example, a first length d1 of the first pattern PA1 (or the secondpattern) of the third coil unit 230-1 (or the fourth coil unit 230-2) inthe width direction may be equal to a second length d2 of the thirdpattern PA2 of the fifth coil unit 230-2 in the width direction.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

d1 may be the distance between opposite outermost ends of each of thethird and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2, and d2 may be the distancebetween opposite outermost ends of the fifth coil unit 230-3. Forexample, d1 may be the length of a central part of each of the third andfourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2, and d2 may be the length of a centralpart of the fifth coil unit 230-3. d1 and d2 may be the lengths of thethird to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 in the width direction.Alternatively, for example, d1 and d2 may be lengths in directions fromthe sides 23 a, 23 b, and 23 c of the circuit member 231 at which thefirst and second coil units are disposed to the opening 231 a.

For example, the first length may be the distance between oppositeoutermost ends of the spiral pattern of each of the first and secondpatterns PA1, and the second length may be the distance between oppositeoutermost ends of the spiral pattern of the third pattern PA2.

For example, d1 may be the distance between opposite outermost ends ofthe outermost line Rn or Qn, among the first lines R1 to Rn (or thesecond lines Q1 to Qn) of FIG. 17A. In addition, for example, d2 may bethe distance between opposite outermost ends of the outermost line Sm orPm, among the first lines S1 to Sm (or the second lines P1 to Pm) ofFIG. 18A.

In another embodiment, the width d2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may begreater than the width d1 of the third coil unit 230-1 (or the fourthcoil unit 230-2). For example, the second length d2 of the third patternPA2 in the width direction may be greater than the first length d1 ofthe first pattern PA1 (or the second pattern) in the width direction.

In a further embodiment, the width d2 of the fifth coil unit 230-3 maybe less than the width d1 of the third coil unit 230-1 (or the fourthcoil unit 230-2). For example, the second length d2 of the third patternPA2 in the width direction may be less than the first length d1 of thefirst pattern PA1 (or the second pattern) in the width direction.

For example, the second coil 230 may include a first dielectric layer71, first layers Layer11 and Layer21 of the third to fifth coil units230-1 to 230-3 disposed on the first dielectric layer 71, a seconddielectric layer 73 disposed on the first layers Layer11 and Layer21,second layers Layer12 and Layer22 disposed on the second dielectriclayer 73, and a third dielectric layer 75 disposed on the second layersLayer12 and Layer22.

Each of the first and third dielectric layers 71 and 75 may include apolymer organic compound or resin. For example, each of the first andthird dielectric layers 71 and 75 may include polyimide andsolder-resist.

The second dielectric layer 73 may include a polymer organic compound orresin. For example, the second dielectric layer 73 may include polyimideand epoxy bonds.

A fourth dielectric layer 72 may be disposed between the first lines R1to Rn or S1 to Sm of each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2,and a fifth dielectric layer 74 may be disposed between the second linesQ1 to Qn or P1 to Pm of each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2.

Each of the third to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may include atleast one via 55 a and 55 b or 56 a and 56 b configured to interconnectthe first layer Layer11 or Layer21 and the second layer Layer12 orLayer22, and the first layer Layer11 or Layer21 and the second layerLayer12 or Layer22 may be connected to each other (e.g. in parallel)through the at least one via 55 a and 55 b or 56 a and 56 b.

Each of the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2 may have a firstvia 55 a configured to interconnect one end of one (e.g. R1) of thefirst lines R1 to Rn and one end of one (e.g. Q1) of the second lines Q1to Qn.

In addition, each of the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2 mayhave a second via 55 b configured to interconnect one end of another(e.g. Rn) of the first lines R1 to Rn and one end of another (e.g. Qn)of the second lines Q1 to Qn.

The first and second vias 55 a and 55 b of each of the third and fourthcoil units 230-1 and 230-2 may pass through or penetrate the dielectriclayer 73. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The first and second vias 55 a and 55 b of each of the third and fourthcoil units 230-1 and 230-2 may interconnect the first lines R1 to Rn andthe second lines Q1 to Qn. Here, the “via” may be referred to as a“contact,” a “connection electrode,” or a “connection pattern.”

In addition, the fifth coil unit 230-3 may have a first via 56 aconfigured to interconnect one end of one (e.g. S1) of the first linesS1 to Sm and one end of one (e.g. P1) of the second lines P1 to Pm.

In addition, the fifth coil unit 230-3 may have a second via 56 bconfigured to interconnect one end of another (e.g. Sm) of the firstlines S1 to Sm and one end of another (e.g. Pm) of the second lines P1to Pm.

The first and second vias 55 a and 55 b of the fifth coil unit 230-3 maypass through or penetrate the dielectric layer 73. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. The first and second vias of thefifth coil unit 230-3 may interconnect the first lines S1 to Sm and thesecond lines P1 to Pm.

A portion of each of the first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 may be openor exposed from at least one of the first and third dielectric layers 71and 75, and the exposed portion may be connected to a corresponding oneof the terminals of the circuit board 250.

For example, a portion of the first layer Layer11 or Layer21 of each ofthe first to third patterns PA1 and PA2 may be open or exposed from thethird dielectric layer 75, and the exposed portion may be connected to acorresponding one of the terminals of the circuit board 250.

For example, a portion of the line of the first layer Layer11 of each ofthe first and second patterns PA1 and a portion of the first layerLayer21 of the third pattern PA2 may be open or exposed from the thirddielectric layer 75, and the exposed portions may be connected to acorresponding one of the terminals of the circuit board 250.

Since the width A2 of each of the first lines S1 to Sm and the secondlines P1 to Pm of the fifth coil unit 230-3 is less than the width A1 ofeach of the first lines R1 to Rn and the second lines Q1 to Qn of thethird coil unit 230-1 (or the fourth coil unit 230-2), the number ofturns (or the number of windings) of the fifth coil unit 230-3 may begreater than the number of turns (or the number of windings) of each ofthe third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2 in the case in which thethird to fifth coil units 230-1 to 230-3 are formed in the same space.As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between theelectromagnetic force generated in the X-axis direction and theelectromagnetic force generated in the Y-axis direction.

For example, the ratio of the number of turns (“first number of turns”)of each of the each of the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2to the number of turns (“second number of turns”) of the fifth coil unit230-3 may be 1:1.1 to 1:2. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

In the case in which the value obtained by dividing the second number ofturns by the first number of turns is less than 1.1, it is not possibleto reduce the difference between the electromagnetic force in the Y-axisdirection and the electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction, wherebyreliability in OIS driving may be deteriorated.

In the case in which the value obtained by dividing the second number ofturns by the first number of turns is greater than 2, resistance of thefifth coil unit 230-3 may be increased, whereby power consumption may beincreased, or the magnitude of a driving signal of the fifth coil unit230-3 may be increased.

For example, the ratio of the number of turns of each of the each of thethird and fourth coil units 230-1 and 230-2 to the number of turns ofthe fifth coil unit 230-3 may be 1:1.1 to 1:1.5. For example, the numberof turns of each of the each of the third and fourth coil units 230-1and 230-2 may be 30, and the number of turns of the fifth coil unit230-3 may be 34. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In addition, since the number of turns of the fifth coil unit 230-3 isgreater than the number of turns of each of the third and fourth coilunits 230-1 and 230-2, the first electromagnetic force generated by thefifth coil unit 230-3 and the third magnet 130-3 may be greater than thesecond electromagnetic force generated by the third coil unit 230-1 andthe first magnet 130-1 and may be greater than the third electromagneticforce generated by the fourth coil unit 230-2 and the second magnet130-2. As a result, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the first electromagnetic force in the X-axis direction and thesum of the second and third electromagnetic forces in the Y-axisdirection, thereby improving reliability in OIS operation.

Each of the third coil unit 230-1 and the fourth coil unit 230-2 mayinclude first straight portions, second straight portions, first curvedportions configured to interconnect one end of each of the firststraight portions and one end of a corresponding one of the secondstraight portions, and second curved portions configured to interconnectthe other end of each of the first straight portions and the other endof a corresponding one of the second straight portions.

The fifth coil unit 230-3 may include third straight portions, fourthstraight portions, third curved portions configured to interconnect oneend of each of the third straight portions and one end of acorresponding one of the fourth straight portions, and fourth curvedportions configured to interconnect the other end of each of the thirdstraight portions and the other end of a corresponding one of the fourthstraight portions.

The width of each of the first straight portions and the width of eachof the second straight portions may be equal to each other, the width ofeach of the third straight portions and the width of each of the fourthstraight portions may be equal to each other. In addition, the width ofeach of the third straight portions or the fourth straight portions maybe less than the width of each of the first straight portions or thesecond straight portions.

For example, the width of each of the first straight portions, the widthof each of the second straight portions, the width of each of the firstcurved portions, and the width of each of the second curved portions maybe A1 described above, and the width of each of the third straightportions, the width of each of the fourth straight portions, the widthof each of the third curved portions, and the width of each of thefourth curved portions may be A2 described above. A description of A1and A2 and a description of the relationship between A1 and A2 may beequally applied.

The distance between the first straight portions, the distance betweenthe first curved portions, the distance between the second straightportions, the distance between the second curved portions, the distancebetween the third straight portions, the distance between the thirdcurved portions, the distance between the fourth straight portions, andthe distance between the fourth curved portions may be B1 describedabove. A description of B1 may be applied.

The width A2 of the pattern of the fifth coil unit 230-3, which is anOIS coil in the X-axis direction, is configured so as to be less thanthe width A1 of the pattern of the third and fourth coil units 230-1 and230-2, which are OIS coils in the Y-axis direction. Consequently, theembodiment is capable of reducing the difference between theelectromagnetic force in the Y-axis direction and the electromagneticforce in the X-axis direction, thereby inhibiting dynamic tilting of thelens moving apparatus due to OIS operation.

The lens moving apparatus 100 according to the above embodiment may berealized as a camera module or an optical instrument or may be used inthe camera module or the optical instrument in various fields.

For example, the lens moving apparatus 100 according to the embodimentmay be included in an optical instrument configured to form an image ofan object in a space using reflection, refraction, absorption,interference, diffraction, etc., which are characteristics of light, toincrease the visual power of the eyes, to record or reproduce an imageformed by a lens, to perform optical measurement, or to propagate ortransfer an image. For example, an optical instrument according to anembodiment may include a smartphone or a portable terminal equipped witha camera.

FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of a camera module 200 accordingto an embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 19, the camera module 200 may include a lens or lensbarrel 400, a lens moving apparatus 100, an adhesive member 612, afilter 610, a first holder 600, a second holder 800, an image sensor810, a motion sensor 820, a controller 830, and a connector 840. Thelens moving apparatus 100 of FIG. 19 may be the lens moving apparatusaccording to the previous embodiment.

The lens or lens barrel 400 may be mounted in the bobbin 110 of the lensmoving apparatus 100.

The first holder 600 may be disposed under the base 210 of the lensmoving apparatus 100. The filter 610 may be mounted to the first holder600, and the first holder 600 may have a projecting portion 500, onwhich the filter 610 is seated.

The adhesive member 612 may couple or adhere the base 210 of the lensmoving apparatus 100 to the first holder 600. The adhesive member 612may function to prevent foreign matter from being introduced into thelens moving apparatus 100 in addition to the function of adhesion.

For example, the adhesive member 612 may be epoxy, a thermo-hardeningadhesive, or an ultraviolet-hardening adhesive.

The filter 610 may function to prevent a specific-frequency-bandcomponent of light passing through the lens barrel 400 from beingincident on the image sensor 810. The filter 610 may be an infraredcutoff filter; however, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In thiscase, the filter 610 may be disposed parallel to the x-y plane.

An opening, through which light passing through the filter 610 isincident on the image sensor 810, may be formed in the region of thefirst holder 600 on which the filter 610 is mounted.

The second holder 800 may be disposed under the first holder 600, andthe image sensor 810 may be mounted on the second holder 600. The imagesensor 810 is a region on which light passing through the filter 610 isincident in order to form an image included in the light.

The second holder 800 may be provided with various circuits, elements,and a controller in order to convert an image formed on the image sensor810 into an electrical signal and to transfer the electrical signal toan external apparatus.

The second holder 800 may be realized as a circuit board, on which theimage sensor may be mounted, on which a circuit pattern may be formed,and on which various elements are coupled to each other.

The image sensor 810 may receive an image included in light incidentthrough the lens moving apparatus 100, and may convert the receivedimage into an electrical signal.

The filter 610 and the image sensor 810 may be disposed so as to bespaced apart from each other in the state of being opposite each otherin the first direction.

The motion sensor 820 may be mounted on the second holder 800, and maybe connected to the controller 830 via the circuit pattern provided onthe second holder 800.

The motion sensor 820 outputs information about rotational angularvelocity based on movement of the camera module 200. The motion sensor820 may be realized as a two-axis or three-axis gyro sensor or anangular velocity sensor.

The controller 830 is mounted or disposed on the second holder 800. Thesecond holder 800 may be connected to the lens moving apparatus 100. Forexample, the second holder 800 may be connected to the circuit board 190of the lens moving apparatus 100.

For example, a driving signal or electric power may be provided to thefirst coil 120 and a driving signal or electric power may be provided tothe second coil 230 via the second holder 800.

For example, a driving signal may be provided to the first positionsensor 170 and the second position sensor 240 via the second holder 800.An output signal of the first position sensor 170 and an output signalof the second position sensor 240 may be transmitted to the secondholder 800. For example, an output signal of the first position sensor170 and an output signal of the second position sensor 240 may bereceived by the controller 830.

The connector 840 may be connected to the second holder 800, and mayhave a port for connection with an external apparatus.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view of a camera module 1000 according toanother embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 20, the camera module 1000 may be a dual camera moduleincluding a first camera module 100-1 including a first lens movingapparatus and a second camera module 100-2 including a second lensmoving apparatus.

Each of the first camera module 100-1 and the second camera module 100-2may be one of an autofocus (AF) camera module or an optical imagestabilization (OIS) camera module.

The AF camera module is a camera module capable of performing only anautofocus function, and the OIS camera module is a camera module capableof performing both an autofocus function and an optical imagestabilization (OIS) function.

For example, the first lens moving apparatus may be the embodiment 100shown in FIG. 1. The second lens moving apparatus may be embodiment 100shown in FIG. 1, a lens moving apparatus for AF, or a lens movingapparatus for OIS.

The camera module 1000 may further include a circuit board 1100 on whichthe first camera module 100-1 and the second camera module 100-2 aremounted. In FIG. 20, the first camera module 100-1 and the second cameramodule 100-2 are disposed side by side on a single circuit board 1100.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,the circuit board 1100 may include a first circuit board and a secondcircuit board separated from each other, the first camera module 100-1may be disposed on the first circuit board, and the second camera module100-2 may be disposed on the second circuit board.

The first camera module 100-1 may be disposed on the circuit board 1100such that the dummy member 135 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 ofthe first camera module 100-1 is located adjacent to the second cameramodule 100-2, whereby it is possible to reduce magnetic fieldinterference between the first to third magnets 130-1 to 130-3 of thefirst camera module 100-1 and magnets included in the second lens movingapparatus of the second camera module 100-2, and therefore it ispossible to secure reliability in AF driving and/or reliability in OISdriving of each of the first camera module 100-1 and the second cameramodule 100-2.

FIG. 21A is a schematic view of an embodiment 1000-1 of the cameramodule shown in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21B is a sectional view of first andsecond lens moving apparatuses 100 a and 100 b of FIG. 21A in the ABdirection of FIG. 3.

Referring to FIGS. 21A and 21B, the camera module 1000-1 may include afirst camera module 100-1 including a first lens moving apparatus 100 aand a second camera module 100-2 including a second lens movingapparatus 100 b.

For example, each of the first camera module 100-1 and the second cameramodule 100-2 may be the camera module 200 shown in FIG. 19.

The first lens moving apparatus 100 a may be the embodiment 100 shown inFIG. 2 or may be configured such that the balancing magnet 185 isomitted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 2.

The second lens moving apparatus 100 b may be the embodiment 100 shownin FIG. 2 or an apparatus configured such that the balancing magnet 185is omitted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 2. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. For example, the second lens moving apparatus100 b may be disposed adjacent to the first lens moving apparatus 100 a,and a second bobbin, in which a lens is disposed, may be moved in theoptical-axis direction or in the direction perpendicular to the opticalaxis.

Each of the first and second lens moving apparatuses 100 and 100 b mayinclude a housing 140 or 140A including a first side portion and asecond side portion opposite each other and a third side portion and afourth side portion opposite each other, a bobbin 110 or 110A disposedin the housing 140 or 140A, a first magnet 130-1 or 130-1A disposed atthe first side portion of the housing 140 or 140A, a second magnet 130-2or 130-2A disposed at the second side portion of the housing 140 or140A, a third magnet 130-3 or 130-3A disposed at the third side portionof the housing 140 or 140A, a dummy member 135 or 135A disposed at thefourth side portion of the housing 140 or 140A, and a first coil 120including a first coil unit 120-1 disposed at the bobbin 110 or 110A soas to be opposite the first magnet 130-1 or 130-1A and a second coilunit 120-2 disposed at the bobbin 110 or 110A so as to be opposite thesecond magnet 130-2 or 130-2A. The fourth side portion of the housing140 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may be disposed adjacent tothe fourth side portion or the third side portion of the housing 140A ofthe second lens moving apparatus 100 b. In addition, when viewed fromabove, the dummy member 135 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a maybe disposed between the third magnet 130-3 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a and the dummy member 135A of the second lens movingapparatus 100 b.

For example, the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may include a “firstlens moving unit” including a first bobbin 110, a first coil 120, afirst magnet 130-1, a second magnet 130-2, a third magnet 130-3, a firstdummy member 135, a first housing 140, an upper elastic member 150, alower elastic member 160, a second coil 230, and a base 210. The firstlens moving unit of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may furtherinclude a first position sensor 170 and a sensing magnet 180.

In addition, the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may include a“second lens moving unit” including a second bobbin 110A, a first coil120, a fourth magnet 130-1A, a fifth magnet 130-2A, a sixth magnet130-3A, a second dummy member 135A, a second housing 140A, an upperelastic member 150, a lower elastic member 160, a second coil 230, and abase 210. The second lens moving unit of the second lens movingapparatus 100 b may further include a first position sensor 170A and asensing magnet 180A.

In addition, each of the first and second lens moving apparatuses 100 aand 100 b may further include at least one of a circuit board 250, asupporting member 220, a second position sensor 240, a circuit board190, a cover member 300, and a balancing magnet.

The first lens moving apparatus 100 a and the second lens movingapparatus 100 b may be disposed adjacent to each other. For example, thedistance d1 between a side plate of the cover member 300 of the firstlens moving apparatus 100 a and a side plate of the cover member 300 ofthe second lens moving apparatus 100 b opposite thereto may be 0.01 mmto 1 mm. For example, d1 may be 0.01 mm to 3 mm.

The fourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the fourth side portion 141-4 of the secondhousing 140A of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may be disposedadjacent to each other.

For example, the fourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 andthe fourth side portion 141-4 of the second housing 140A may be disposedparallel to each other. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

Each of the first dummy member 135 and the second dummy member 135A maybe disposed at a corresponding one of the fourth side portions of thefirst housing 140 and the second housing 140A adjacent to each other.

The first dummy member 135 and the second dummy member 135A may bedisposed adjacent to each other.

The first bobbin 110 and the second bobbin 110A may be disposed spacedapart from each other.

The first magnet 130-1 may be disposed at a first side of the firstbobbin 110, and may be disposed spaced apart from the first side of thefirst bobbin 110 or adjacent to the first side of the first bobbin 110.

For example, the first magnet 130-1 may be disposed between the firstbobbin 110 (e.g. the first side of the first bobbin 110) and the firsthousing 140. For example, the first magnet 130-1 may be disposed at thefirst housing 140 so as to correspond to the first side of the firstbobbin 110.

The second magnet 130-2 may be disposed at a second side of the firstbobbin 110 opposite the first side of the first bobbin 110, and may bedisposed spaced apart from the second side of the first bobbin 110 oradjacent to the second side of the first bobbin 110.

For example, the second magnet 130-2 may be disposed between the firstbobbin 110 (e.g. the second side of the first bobbin 110) and the firsthousing 140. For example, the second magnet 130-2 may be disposed at thefirst housing 140 so as to correspond to the second side of the firstbobbin 110.

The third magnet 130-3 may be disposed at a third side of the firstbobbin 110 adjacent to the first side of the first bobbin 110, and maybe disposed spaced apart from the third side of the first bobbin 110 oradjacent to the second side of the first bobbin 110.

For example, the third magnet 130-3 may be disposed between the firstbobbin 110 (e.g. the third side of the first bobbin 110) and the firsthousing 140. For example, the third magnet 130-3 may be disposed at thefirst housing 140 so as to correspond to the third side of the firstbobbin 110.

The fourth magnet 130-1A may be disposed at a first side of the secondbobbin 110A, and may be disposed spaced apart from the first side of thesecond bobbin 110A or adjacent to the first side of the second bobbin110A.

For example, the fourth magnet 130-1A may be disposed between the secondbobbin 110A (e.g. the first side of the second bobbin 110A) and thesecond housing 140A. For example, the fourth magnet 130-1A may bedisposed at the second housing 140A so as to correspond to the firstside of the second bobbin 110A.

The fifth magnet 130-2A may be disposed at a second side of the secondbobbin 110A opposite the first side of the second bobbin 110A, and maybe disposed spaced apart from the second side of the second bobbin 110Aor adjacent to the second side of the second bobbin 110A.

For example, the fifth magnet 130-2A may be disposed between the secondbobbin 110A (e.g. the second side of the second bobbin 110A) and thesecond housing 140A. For example, the fifth magnet 130-2A may bedisposed at the second housing 140A so as to correspond to the secondside of the second bobbin 110A.

The sixth magnet 130-3A may be disposed at a third side of the secondbobbin 110A adjacent to the first side of the second bobbin 110A, andmay be disposed spaced apart from the third side of the second bobbin110A or adjacent to the third side of the second bobbin 110A.

For example, the sixth magnet 130-3A may be disposed between the secondbobbin 110A (e.g. the third side of the second bobbin 110A) and thesecond housing 140A. For example, the sixth magnet 130-3A may bedisposed at the second housing 140A so as to correspond to the thirdside of the second bobbin 110A.

The first dummy member 135 may be disposed at a fourth side of the firstbobbin 110 opposite the third side of the first bobbin 110, and may bedisposed spaced apart from the fourth side of the first bobbin 110 oradjacent to the fourth side of the first bobbin 110.

The second dummy member 135A may be disposed at a fourth side of thesecond bobbin 110A opposite the third side of the second bobbin 110A,and may be disposed spaced apart from the fourth side of the secondbobbin 110A or adjacent to the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A.

The first coil 120 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may includea first coil unit 120-1 disposed between the first bobbin 110 and thefirst magnet 130-1 and a second coil unit 120-2 disposed between thefirst bobbin 110 and the second magnet 130-2.

The first coil 120 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may includea third coil unit 120-1 disposed between the second bobbin 110A and thefourth magnet 130-1A and a fourth coil unit 120-2 disposed between thesecond bobbin 110A and the fifth magnet 130-2A.

A description of the first magnet 130-1 may be applied to the fourthmagnet 130-1A, a description of the second magnet 130-2 may be appliedto the fifth magnet 130-2A, and a description of the third magnet 130-3may be applied to the sixth magnet 130-3A. In addition, a description ofthe first dummy member 135 may be applied to the second dummy member135A.

The first dummy member 135 and the second dummy member 135A may bedisposed so as to overlap each other in a direction from the thirdmagnet 130-3 to the sixth magnet 130-3A.

Alternatively, when viewed from above, the first dummy member 135 andthe second dummy member 135A may be disposed so as to overlap each otherin a direction from the first bobbin 110 (e.g. the fourth side) to thesecond bobbin 110A (e.g. the fourth side).

For example, the distance D11 between the first dummy member 135 and thesecond dummy member 135A may be less than the distance D12 between themagnet 130-2 (or the magnet 130-1) of the first lens moving apparatus100 a and the magnet 130-1A (or the magnet 130-2A) of the second lensmoving apparatus 100 b (D11<D12).

Each of D11 and D12 may be a distance in a first horizontal direction.Here, the first horizontal direction may be a direction from the firstbobbin 110 (e.g. the fourth side of the first bobbin 110) to the secondbobbin 110A (e.g. the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A).Alternatively, the first horizontal direction may be a direction fromthe fourth side portion of the first housing 140 to the fourth sideportion of the second housing 140A. The first horizontal direction maybe a direction from the third magnet 130-3 to the sixth magnet 130-3A.

In addition, for example, the distance D11 may be less than the distanceD13 between the magnet 130-3 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 aand the second dummy member 135A of the second lens moving apparatus 100b (D11<D13).

In addition, for example, the distance D11 may be less than the distanceD14 between the magnet 130-1 (or the magnet 130-2) of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the second dummy member 135A of the secondlens moving apparatus 100 b (D11<D14).

Since D11 is less than D12 to D14, it is possible to reduce effects onAF driving force and OIS driving force due to magnetic fieldinterference between the magnets 130-1 and 130-2 of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the second magnets 130-1A and 130-2A of thesecond lens moving apparatus 100 b.

In addition, the first position sensor 170 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a and the first position sensor 170A of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 b may be disposed at a corresponding one of thefourth side portions of the first housing 140 and the second housing140A adjacent to each other.

The sensing magnet 180 (hereinafter referred to as a “first sensingmagnet”) of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may be disposed at oneside portion (or one side surface) of the first bobbin 110 correspondingto or opposite the fourth side portion of the first housing 140, e.g.the fourth side of the first bobbin 110.

The sensing magnet 180A (hereinafter referred to as a “second sensingmagnet”) of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may be disposed atone side portion (or one side surface) of the second bobbin 110Acorresponding to or opposite the fourth side portion of the secondhousing 140A, e.g. the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A.

For example, the magnets 130-1 and 130-2 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a and the magnets 130-1 and 130-2 of the second lensmoving apparatus 100 b may overlap each other in a direction from thefourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 (or the fourth sideof the first bobbin 110) to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the secondhousing 140A (or the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A). However,the disclosure is not limited thereto.

For example, the coil units 120-1 and 120-2 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a may overlap the coil units 120-1 and 120-2 of the secondlens moving apparatus 100 b in the direction from the fourth sideportion 141-4 of the first housing 140 (or the fourth side of the firstbobbin 110) to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the second housing 140A(or the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A). However, the disclosureis not limited thereto.

For example, the first sensing magnet 180 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a may overlap the second sensing magnet 180 of the secondlens moving apparatus 100 b in the direction from the fourth sideportion 141-4 of the first housing 140 (or the fourth side of the firstbobbin 110) to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the second housing 140A(or the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A). However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. In another embodiment, both may not overlap eachother.

In addition, for example, the magnet 130-3 of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a and the magnet 130-3A of the second lens movingapparatus 100 b may overlap each other in the direction from the fourthside portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 (or the fourth side of thefirst bobbin 110) to the fourth side portion 141-4 of the second housing140A (or the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A).

In addition, for example, the first dummy member 135 of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the second dummy member 135A of the secondlens moving apparatus 100 b may overlap each other in the direction fromthe fourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 (or the fourthside of the first bobbin 110) to the fourth side portion 141-4 of thesecond housing 140A (or the fourth side of the second bobbin 110A).

For example, the first dummy member 135 may be disposed between themagnet 130-3 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a and the magnet130-3A of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b.

For example, the first dummy member 135 may be disposed between thefirst bobbin 110 and the second bobbin 110A. In addition, for example,the second dummy member 135A may be disposed between the first bobbin110 and the second bobbin 110A.

The second coil 230 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a may includea coil unit 230-1 disposed under the magnet 130-1, a coil unit 230-2disposed under the second magnet 130-2, and a coil unit 230-3 disposedunder the third magnet 130-3.

In addition, the second coil 230 of the second lens moving apparatus 100b may include a coil unit 230-1 disposed under the magnet 130-1A, a coilunit 230-2 disposed under the second magnet 130-2A, and a coil unit230-3 disposed under the third magnet 130-3A.

In another embodiment, the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may havemagnet disposition different from FIG. 18A. For example, a second lensmoving apparatus according to another embodiment may include a magnetdisposed at at least one of the four side portions 141-1 to 141-4 of thesecond housing 140A. For example, the second lens moving apparatus mayinclude four magnets disposed at the four side portions 141-1 to 141-4of the second housing 140A. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

A second lens moving apparatus according to a further embodiment mayinclude a magnet disposed at at least one of the four corners 142-1 to142-4 of the second housing 140A. For example, the second lens movingapparatus may include four magnets disposed at the four corners 142-1 to142-4 of the second housing 140A. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

A camera module according to another embodiment may include a firsthousing 140, a first bobbin 110 disposed in the first housing 140,magnets 130-1 to 130-3 disposed between the first housing 140 and thefirst bobbin 110, a coil 120 disposed between the magnets 130-1 to 130-3and the first bobbin 110, and a dummy member 135 disposed between thefirst housing 140 and the first bobbin 110.

In addition, the second lens moving unit may include a second housing140A, a second bobbin 110 a disposed in the second housing 140A, magnets130-1A to 130-3A disposed between the second housing 140A and the secondbobbin 110 a, and a coil 120 disposed between the magnets 130-1A to130-3A and the second bobbin 110 a.

The magnets 130-1 to 130-3 of the first lens moving unit may include afirst magnet 130-1 disposed at a first side of the first housing 140, asecond magnet 130-2 disposed at a second side of the first housing 140opposite the first side of the first housing 140, and a third magnet130-3 disposed at a third side of the first housing 140 adjacent to thefirst side of the first housing 140.

The dummy member 135 of the first lens moving unit may be disposedbetween the first bobbin 110 and the second bobbin.

FIG. 22 is a schematic view of a camera module 1000-2 according toanother embodiment.

The camera module 1000-2 of FIG. 22 may include a first camera module100-1 including a first lens moving apparatus 100 a, a second cameramodule 100-2 including a second lens moving apparatus 100 b, and a thirdcamera module 100-3 including a third lens moving apparatus 100 c. Thefirst to third camera modules 100-1, 100-2, and 100-3 may be arrangedside by side.

In FIG. 22, an embodiment having a triple structure including threecamera modules is described. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, two camera modules (100-1 and 100-2 ofFIG. 19) may be included. In a further embodiment, four or more cameramodules arranged as shown in FIG. 22 may be included.

For example, each of the first to third camera modules 100-1, 100-2, and100-3 may be the camera module 200 shown in FIG. 19, and each of thefirst to third lens moving apparatuses 100 a, 100 b, and 100 c may bethe embodiment 100 shown in FIG. 2 or may be configured such that thebalancing magnet 185 is omitted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 2.

The first to third lens moving apparatuses 100 a, 100 b, and 100 c maybe arranged side by side adjacent to each other, and a description of d1of FIG. 18B may be applied to the distance therebetween. The fourth sideportion of one of housings of two adjacent lens moving apparatuses andthe third side portion of the other may be disposed adjacent to eachother.

For example, the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing of the firstlens moving apparatus 100 a and the third side portion 141-3 of thehousing of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b may be disposedadjacent to each other.

In addition, the fourth side portion 141-4 of the housing of the secondlens moving apparatus 100 b and the third side portion 141-3 of thehousing of the third lens moving apparatus 100 c may be disposedadjacent to each other.

For example, the fourth side portion of the housing of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the third side portion of the housing of thesecond lens moving apparatus 100 b may be disposed adjacent to eachother and parallel to each other, and the fourth side portion of thehousing of the second lens moving apparatus 100 b and the third sideportion of the housing of the third lens moving apparatus 100 c may bedisposed adjacent to each other and parallel to each other.

The dummy member of one of two adjacent lens moving apparatuses and thethird magnet 135 of the other may be disposed adjacent to each other.

For example, the distance D1 between the dummy member of one of twoadjacent lens moving apparatuses and the third magnet 135 of the othermay be less than the distance D2 between the first magnet 130-1 (or thesecond magnet 130-2) of one of two adjacent lens moving apparatuses andthe first magnet 130-1 (or the second magnet 130-2) of the other(D1<D2).

In addition, for example, the distance D1 may be less than the distanceD3 between the third magnet 130-3 of one of two adjacent lens movingapparatuses and the third magnet 130-3 of the other (D1<D3).

In addition, for example, the distance D1 may be less than the distanceD4 between the first magnet 130-1 (or the second magnet 130-2) of one oftwo adjacent lens moving apparatuses and the third magnet 130-3 of theother (D1<D4).

Since D1 is less than D2 to D4, it is possible to reduce effects on AFdriving force and OIS driving force due to magnetic field interferencebetween magnets included in two adjacent lens moving apparatuses, andtherefore it is possible to secure reliability in AF operation and OISoperation.

In addition, the position sensor of one of two adjacent lens movingapparatuses (e.g. 100-1 and 100-2 or 100-2 and 100-3) and the thirdmagnet 130-3 of the other may be disposed at a corresponding one ofadjacent third and fourth side portions of two adjacent housings.

In addition, the sensing magnet of one of two adjacent lens movingapparatuses may be disposed at a side portion (or a side surface) of thebobbin corresponding to or opposite the fourth side portion which is oneof adjacent third and fourth side portions of two adjacent housings.

The sensing magnet of the other of the two adjacent lens movingapparatuses may be disposed at a side portion (or a side surface) of thebobbin corresponding to or opposite the fourth side portion locatedopposite the third side portion which is one of the adjacent third andfourth side portions.

For example, in a direction from the fourth side portion of one of twoadjacent housings to the third side portion of the other, the first andsecond magnets 130-1 and 130-2 disposed at one of the housings and thefirst and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2 disposed at the other housingmay not overlap each other.

For example, in the direction from the fourth side portion of one of twoadjacent housings to the third side portion of the other, the first andsecond coil units 120-1 and 120-2 of one of the two adjacent lens movingapparatuses may not overlap the first and second coil units 120-1 and120-2 of the other of the two adjacent lens moving apparatuses.

For example, in the direction from the fourth side portion of one of twoadjacent housings to the third side portion of the other, the sensingmagnet 180 of one of the two adjacent lens moving apparatuses mayoverlap the sensing magnet 180 of the other of the two adjacent lensmoving apparatuses. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Inanother embodiment, both may not overlap each other.

In addition, for example, in the direction from the fourth side portionof one of two adjacent housings to the third side portion of the other,two third magnets 130-3 of the two adjacent lens moving apparatuses mayoverlap each other.

For example, in the direction from the fourth side portion of one of twoadjacent housings to the third side portion of the other, two dummymembers 135 of the two adjacent lens moving apparatuses may overlap eachother.

In FIG. 22, the dummy member and the third magnet are disposed at sideportions of two adjacent housings. Consequently, the embodiment 1000-2is capable of reducing effects on AF driving force and OIS driving forcedue to magnetic field interference between the first and second magnets130-1 and 130-3 included in adjacent lens moving apparatuses, therebysecuring reliability in AF operation and OIS operation.

When comparing the embodiment of FIG. 21A and the embodiment of FIG. 22,the distance between the two third magnets 130-3 and 130-3A of the twocamera modules (e.g. 100-1 and 100-2) of FIG. 21A is greater than thedistance between the two third magnets 130-3 of two adjacent cameramodules (e.g. 100-1 and 100-2) of FIG. 22, whereby the magnetic fieldinterference reduction effect in the embodiment of FIG. 21A may bebetter.

FIG. 23A shows a simulation result of force applied to the third magnet130-3 and the sensing magnet 180 of the camera module 1000-2 of FIG. 22,and FIG. 23B shows a simulation result of stroke variation(displacement) of the third magnet 130-3 and the sensing magnet 180 ofthe camera module of FIG. 22. In FIGS. 23A and 23B, OIS indicates themagnets 130-1 and 130-2, and Smagnet indicates the sensing magnets.

FIGS. 23A and 23B show the simulation results of force and strokevariation at the initial position of the lens moving apparatus of eachcamera module. Here, the initial position of the lens moving apparatusmay be the original position of the OIS moving unit in the state inwhich no driving signals are provided to the first coil 120 and thesecond coil 230 or the position at which the OIS moving unit is locatedas the result of the upper and lower elastic members 150 and 160 and thesupporting member 220 being elastically deformed due only to the weightof the OIS moving unit. In addition, the initial position may be theposition at which the OIS moving unit is located when gravity acts inthe direction from the bobbin 110 to the base 210 or when gravity actsin the direction from the base 210 to the bobbin 110.

It is assumed that the spring constant of OIS in the X-axis and Y-axisdirections is 60 mN/mm and the spring constant of OIS in the Z-axisdirection is 500 mN/mm. It is assumed that the distance between twoadjacent camera modules is 0.75 mm, the lengths of each camera module inthe horizontal direction and the vertical direction are 12 mm, and thethickness of each camera module is 3.3 mm.

Referring to FIG. 23A, it can be seen that force applied to the thirdmagnet 130-3 of each of the camera modules 100-1 to 100-3 due tomagnetic field interference is less than 0.5 mN in a positive (+)direction and a negative (−) direction. In addition, it can be seen thatforce applied to the sensing magnet 180 of each of the camera modules100-1 to 100-3 due to magnetic field interference is less than 0.5 mN inthe positive (+) direction and the negative (−) direction.

Here, “less than 0.5 mN” is merely an analysis error based onsimulation. Consequently, it may be estimated that the force applied toeach of the third magnet 130-3 and the sensing magnet 180 of each of thecamera modules 100-1 to 100-3 due to magnetic field interference issubstantially insignificant.

For example, force applied to the third magnet 130-3 of one cameramodule may include force applied to the magnets 130-1, 130-2, and 130-3and the sensing magnet 180 included in each of the first to third cameramodules 100-1 to 100-3 excluding the third magnet 130-3 of the cameramodule.

In addition, force applied to the sensing magnet 180 of one cameramodule may include force applied to the magnets 130-1, 130-2, and 130-3and the sensing magnet 180 included in each of the first to third cameramodules 100-1 to 100-3 excluding the sensing magnet 180 of the cameramodule.

Referring to FIG. 23B, it can be seen that stroke variation of the thirdmagnet 130-3 of each of the camera modules 100-1 to 100-3 due tomagnetic field interference is less than 5 μm from the initial positionin the positive (+) direction and the negative (−) direction.

Also, it can be seen that stroke variation of the sensing magnet 180 ofeach of the camera modules 100-1 to 100-3 due to magnetic fieldinterference is less than 2 μm from the initial position in the positive(+) direction and the negative (−) direction.

The stroke variation of the third magnet 130-3 of less than 5 μm and thestroke variation of the sensing magnet 180 of less than 2 μm are merelyanalysis errors based on simulation. Consequently, it may be estimatedthat the stroke variation of each of the third magnet 130-3 and thesensing magnet 180 of each of the camera modules 100-1 to 100-3 due tomagnetic field interference is substantially insignificant.

Based on the simulation results of FIGS. 23A and 23B, reliability in AFoperation and OIS operation of the camera module according to theembodiment may be secured.

In addition, since the first to third lens moving apparatuses 100 a, 100b, and 100 c are arranged in the same direction, the same coordinateaxes may be used, and therefore it is not necessary to correct positioninformation of a gyro sensor due to use of different coordinate axes. In21A and 21B, the first lens moving apparatus 100 a and the second lensmoving apparatus 100 b use different coordinate axes, since both aredisposed in left-right symmetry, and therefore it is necessary tocorrect position information of the gyro sensor due to use of differentcoordinate axes.

FIG. 24 is a schematic view of a camera module 1000-3 according to afurther embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 24, the camera module 1000-3 may include a firstcamera module 100-1 including a first lens moving apparatus 100 a and asecond camera module 100-4 including a second lens moving apparatus 100d.

The first lens moving apparatus 100 a may be the embodiment 100 shown inFIG. 2 or may be configured such that the balancing magnet 185 isomitted from the embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The first camera module100-1 may be the camera module 200 shown in FIG. 19.

The second lens moving apparatus 100 d may be a closed loop autofocus(CLAF) lens moving apparatus, and the second camera module 100-4 mayinclude a CLAF lens moving apparatus instead of the lens movingapparatus 100 of the camera module 200 shown in FIG. 19.

FIG. 25 shows an embodiment of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d ofFIG. 24.

Referring to FIG. 25, the second lens moving apparatus 100 d may includea bobbin 1110, a coil 1120, a first magnet 1130-1, a second magnet1130-2, a housing 1140, an upper elastic member 1150, a lower elasticmember 1160, a circuit board 1190, a position sensor 1170, and a sensingmagnet 1180.

In addition, the second lens moving apparatus 100 d may include abalancing magnet 1185, a cover member 1300, and a base 1210.

The bobbin 1110 may have an opening, in which a lens or a lens barrel ismounted.

The coil 1120 may be disposed at the outer surface of the bobbin 1110.For example, the coil 1120 may have a closed-curved shape, such as aring shape, in which the coil is wound around the outer circumferentialsurface of the bobbin 1100 in a rotational direction about the opticalaxis. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, the coil 1120 may include a first coil unit opposite thefirst magnet 1130-1 and a second coil unit opposite the second magnet1130-2. Each of the first coil unit and the second coil unit may be acoil ring or a ring-shaped coil block, and may be fixed to the outersurface of the bobbin 1110. The first coil unit and the second coil unitmay be connected to each other.

The sensing magnet 1180 may be disposed at one side portion (or one sidesurface) of the bobbin 1110, and the balancing magnet 1185 may bedisposed at another side portion (or another side surface) of the bobbin1110 opposite the one side portion of the bobbin 1110. The balancingmagnet 1185 may offset or reduce the effect of electromagnetic force dueto magnetic field interference between the sensing magnet 1180 and thefirst and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2.

The bobbin 1110 may be provided in the one side portion thereof with afirst seating recess, in which the sensing magnet 1180 is seated, andthe bobbin 1110 may be provided in the other side portion thereof with asecond seating recess, in which the balancing magnet 1185 is seated.

The sensing magnet 1180 may be disposed inside the coil 1120 in thestate of being disposed in the first seating recess, and the balancingmagnet 1185 may be disposed inside the coil 1120 in the state of beingdisposed in the second seating recess. Here, the inside of the coil 1120may be the side of the coil 1120 toward the center of the bobbin 1110.

The housing 1140 may include an opening configured to receive the bobbin1110, at which the coil 1120 is disposed, therein, and the bobbin 1110may be disposed inside the housing 1140.

For example, the housing 1140 may include first to fourth side portions1141-1 to 1141-4 spaced apart from each other and first to fourth cornerportions spaced apart from each other. The first and second sideportions 1141-1 and 1141-2 of the housing 1140 may be opposite eachother. Third and fourth side portions 1141-3 and 1141-4 of the housing1140 may be located between the first side portion 1141-1 and the secondside portion 1141-2 of the housing 1140, and may be opposite each other.

The first magnet 1130-1 may be disposed at the first side portion 1141-1of the housing 1140, and the second magnet 1130-2 may be disposed at thesecond side portion 1141-2 of the housing 1140.

Each of the first and second magnets 1130-1 and 1130-2 may be amonopolar magnetized magnet or a bipolar magnetized magnet.

The position sensor 1170 and the circuit board 1190 may be disposed atthe fourth side portion 1141-4 of the housing 1140 so as to correspondto the sensing magnet 1180.

For example, the circuit board 1190 may be disposed at the outer surfaceof the fourth side portion 1141-4 of the housing 1140, and the positionsensor 1170 may be disposed or mounted on the circuit board 1190.

The sensing magnet 1180 may be disposed at the side portion 1110-4 (orthe side surface) of the bobbin 1110 corresponding to or opposite thefourth side portion 1141-4 of the housing 1140.

The balancing magnet 1185 may be disposed at the side portion 1110-3 (orthe side surface) of the bobbin 1110 corresponding to or opposite thethird side portion 1141-3 of the housing 1140.

In another embodiment, the circuit board 1190 and the position sensor1170 may be disposed at the third side portion 1141-3 of the housing1140, the sensing magnet 1180 may be disposed at the side portion (orthe side surface) of the bobbin 1110 corresponding to the third sideportion 1141-3 of the housing 1140, and the balancing magnet 1185 may bedisposed at the side portion 1110-4 of the bobbin 1110 corresponding tothe fourth side portion 1141-4 of the housing 1140.

The bobbin 1110 may be moved in the optical-axis direction byelectromagnetic force due to electromagnetic interaction between thecoil 1120 and the first and second magnets 1130-1 and 1130-2. Theposition sensor 1170 may sense a change in the intensity of a magneticfield of the sensing magnet 1180 mounted to the bobbin 1110 as theresult of movement of the bobbin 1110, and may output an output signal(e.g. output voltage) based on the result of sensing. The positionsensor 1170 may be a Hall sensor or a driver IC including a Hall sensorand a driver.

The upper elastic member 1150 may be coupled to the upper portion, theupper surface, or the upper end of the bobbin 1110 and to the upperportion, the upper surface, or the upper end of the housing 1140. Forexample, the upper elastic member 1150 may include at least one upperspring.

The lower elastic member 1160 may be coupled to the lower portion, thelower surface, or the lower end of the bobbin 1110 and to the lowerportion, the lower surface, or the lower end of the housing 1140. Forexample, the lower elastic member 1160 may include at least one lowerspring.

For example, at least one of the upper elastic member 1150 and the lowerelastic member 1160 may include two or more springs separated from eachother.

The coil 1120 may be connected to at least one of the upper elasticmember 1150 and the lower elastic member 1160. In addition, at least oneof the upper elastic member 1150 and the lower elastic member 1160 maybe connected to the circuit board 1190.

The circuit board 1190 may include a plurality of terminals forconnection with the outside. The position sensor 1170 may be connectedto a corresponding one of the plurality of terminals of the circuitboard 1190.

The coil 1120 may be connected to a corresponding one of the pluralityof terminals of the circuit board 1190 via the upper elastic member 1150or the lower elastic member 1160.

The base 1210 may be disposed under the housing 1140. For example, thebase 1210 may be disposed under the lower elastic member 1160.

The cover member 1300 may be formed in the shape of a box, the lowerportion of which is open and which includes an upper plate and sideplates, and may cover the housing 1140 and the bobbin 1110. The lowerportion of the cover member 1300 may be coupled to the upper portion ofthe base 1210. The base 1210 and the cover member 1300 may form areceiving space for the bobbin 1110 and the housing 1140.

The base 1210 may have an opening corresponding to the opening of thebobbin 1110 and/or the opening of the housing 1140.

The housing 1140 may be provided in the first to fourth corner portionsthereof with guide recesses 1148, into which guide portions 1216 of thebase 1210 are inserted, and the guide portions 1216 of the base 1210 maybe fastened or coupled to the guide recesses 1148 of the housing 1140using an adhesive member (not shown), such as epoxy or silicone.

Referring to FIGS. 24 and 25, the first lens moving apparatus 100 a andthe second lens moving apparatus 100 b may be disposed adjacent to eachother, and a description of d1 of FIGS. 21A and 21B may be applied tothe distance therebetween.

The first lens moving apparatus 100 a may include a first housing 140including a first side portion and a second side portion opposite eachother and a third side portion and a fourth side portion opposite eachother, a first bobbin 110 disposed in the first housing 140, a firstmagnet 130-1 disposed at the first side portion of the first housing140, a second magnet 130-3 disposed at the second side portion of thefirst housing 140, a third magnet 130-3 disposed at the third sideportion of the first housing 140, a dummy member 135 and a first coilsensor 170 disposed at the fourth side portion of the first housing 140,a first coil 120 including a first coil unit 120-1 disposed at the firstbobbin 110 so as to be opposite the first magnet 130-1 and a second coilunit 120-2 disposed at the first bobbin 110 so as to be opposite thesecond magnet 130-2, and a sensing magnet 180 (or a fourth magnet)disposed at the first bobbin so as to be opposite the first positionsensor 170.

The second lens moving apparatus 100 d may include a second bobbin 1110,a coil 1120 disposed at the second bobbin 1110, a first magnet 1130-1and a second magnet 1130-2 opposite the coil 1120, a position sensor1170, and a sensing magnet 1180 (or a third magnet) disposed at thesecond bobbin 1110 so as to be opposite the position sensor 1170. Inaddition, when viewed from above, the first dummy member 135 of thefirst lens moving apparatus 100 a may be disposed between the thirdmagnet 130-3 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a and the sensingmagnet 1180 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d.

The fourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 of the first lensmoving apparatus 100 a and the third side portion 1141-3 of the secondhousing 1140 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d may be disposedadjacent to each other.

For example, the fourth side portion 141-4 of the first housing 140 andthe third side portion 1141-3 of the second housing 1140 may be disposedparallel to each other. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The dummy member 135 of the first lens moving apparatus 100 a and thebalancing magnet 1185 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d may bedisposed at a corresponding one of the fourth side portion 141-4 of thefirst housing 140 and the third side portion 1141-3 of the secondhousing 1140 located adjacent to each other.

For example, the distance D21 between the dummy member 135 and thebalancing magnet 1185 may be less than the distance D22 between thefirst magnet 130-1 (or the second magnet 130-2) of the first lens movingapparatus 100 a and the first magnet 1130-1 (or the second magnet1130-2) of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d (D21<D22).

In addition, for example, the distance D21 may be less than the distanceD23 between the third magnet 130-3 of the first lens moving apparatus100 a and the balancing magnet 1185 of the second lens moving apparatus100 d (D21<D23).

In addition, for example, the distance D21 may be less than the distanceD24 between the first magnet 130-1 (or the second magnet 130-2) of thefirst lens moving apparatus 100 a and the balancing magnet 1185 of thesecond lens moving apparatus 100 d (D21<D24).

Since D21 is less than D22 to D24, it is possible to reduce effects onAF driving force and OIS driving force due to magnetic fieldinterference between the first and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2 of thefirst lens moving apparatus 100 a and the first and second magnets1130-1 and 1130-2 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d.

For example, the first and second magnets 130-1 and 130-2 of the firstlens moving apparatus 100 a and the first and second magnets 1130-1 and1130-2 of the second lens moving apparatus 100 d may not overlap eachother in a direction from the fourth side portion 141-4 of the firsthousing 140 to the third side portion 1141-3 of the second housing 1140.

For example, the sensing magnet 180 of the first lens moving apparatus100 a may overlap the balancing magnet 1185 of the second lens movingapparatus 100 d in the direction from the fourth side portion 141-4 ofthe first housing 140 to the third side portion 1141-3 of the secondhousing 1140. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, both may not overlap each other.

A second lens moving apparatus according to another embodiment may havemagnet disposition different from FIGS. 24 and 25. For example, as amodification of FIGS. 24 and 25, a second lens moving apparatusaccording to another embodiment may include a magnet disposed at atleast one of four side portions of a housing of the second lens movingapparatus. For example, the second lens moving apparatus according tothe other embodiment may include four magnets disposed at the four sideportions of the housing. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In addition, as a modification of FIGS. 24 and 25, a second lens movingapparatus according to a further embodiment may include a magnetdisposed at at least one of four corners of a housing of the second lensmoving apparatus. For example, the second lens moving apparatusaccording to the further embodiment may include four magnets disposed atthe four corners of the housing. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto.

FIG. 26A shows an example of disposition of magnets, a sensing magnet,and a balancing magnet of two adjacent lens moving apparatuses of a dualcamera.

Referring to FIG. 26A, the dual camera may include a first camera module10-1 including a first lens moving apparatus 10 a for OIS and a secondcamera module 10-2 including a first lens moving apparatus 10 b forCLAF.

A fourth side portion of a first housing (not shown) of the first lensmoving apparatus 10 a for OIS and a fourth side portion of a secondhousing (not shown) of the first lens moving apparatus 10 b for CLAF maybe disposed adjacent to each other.

The first lens moving apparatus 10 a for OIS may include four magnetsDM1 to DM4, a first sensing magnet SM1, and a first balancing magnetBM1.

The four magnets DM1 to DM4 may be disposed at first to fourth sideportions of the first housing, the first sensing magnet SM1 may bedisposed at one side portion (or one side surface) of a bobbincorresponding to a first corner of the first housing adjacent to thefourth side portion of the first housing, and the first balancing magnetBM1 may be disposed at a side portion of the bobbin opposite to the sideportion at which the first sensing magnet SM1 is disposed.

The first lens moving apparatus 10 b for CLAF may include two magnetsDM11 and DM12 disposed at first and second side portions of the secondhousing, a second balancing magnet BM2 disposed at a side portion of abobbin opposite the fourth side portion of the second housing, and asecond sensing magnet SM2 disposed at another side portion of the bobbincorresponding to or opposite a third side portion of the second housingopposite the fourth side portion of the second housing. Positions of thesecond balancing magnet BM2 and the second sensing magnet SM2 may bereversed.

In FIG. 26A, an OIS magnet is disposed at one of the fourth side portionof the first housing and the fourth side portion of the second housing,whereby the second balancing magnet (or the second sensing magnet) ofthe first lens moving apparatus 10 b for CLAF may be subject to greatmagnetic field interference due to the magnet DM4 of the first lensmoving apparatus 10 a for OIS. In addition, reliability in AF operationand OIS operation of the first lens moving apparatus 10 a for OIS and AFoperation of the first lens moving apparatus 10 b for CLAF may bedeteriorated due to magnetic field interference between the magnet DM4of the first lens moving apparatus 10 a for OIS and the magnets DM11 andDM12 of the first lens moving apparatus 10 b for CLAF.

FIG. 26B shows another example of the disposition of the magnets, thesensing magnet, and the balancing magnet of the two adjacent lens movingapparatuses of the dual camera.

In order to reduce effects by the magnetic field interference describedwith reference to FIG. 26A, magnets DM21 to DM24, a sensing magnet SM3,and a balancing magnet BM3 may be disposed in a first lens movingapparatus 10 c for OIS, as shown in FIG. 26B.

The first lens moving apparatus 10 c may include a first housingincluding a first corner and a second corner opposite each other in adiagonal direction and a third corner and a fourth corner opposite eachother in the diagonal direction, a first bobbin disposed in the firsthousing, a coil disposed at the first bobbin, first magnets DM21 to DM24disposed at the first to fourth corners of the first housing, a positionsensor disposed between the first corner and the third corner of thefirst housing adjacent to each other, and a sensing magnet SM3 (or asecond magnet) disposed at the first bobbin so as to be opposite theposition sensor.

The second lens moving apparatus 10 b may include a second bobbin, acoil disposed at the second bobbin, a first magnet DM11 and a secondmagnet DM12 opposite the coil, a position sensor 1170, and a sensingmagnet SM2 (or a third magnet) disposed at the second bobbin so as to beopposite the position sensor. The second lens moving apparatus 10 b maybe disposed adjacent to the second corner and the third corner of thefirst housing of the first lens moving apparatus 10 c, and the directionin which the first magnet DM11 and the second magnet DM12 of the secondlens moving apparatus 10 b are opposite each other may correspond to thedirection in which the third corner and the second corner of the firsthousing of the first lens moving apparatus 10 c are joined to eachother.

A fourth side portion of the first housing of the first lens movingapparatus 10 c and a fourth side portion of the second housing of thesecond lens moving apparatus 10 b may be disposed adjacent to eachother. A third side portion of the first housing may be opposite thefourth side portion of the first housing, and a first side portion and asecond side portion of the first housing may be disposed between thethird side portion and the fourth side portion of the first housing soas to be opposite each other.

The magnets DM21 to DM24 may be disposed at the corner portions of thefirst housing of the first lens moving apparatus 10 c. Each of thecorner portions of the first housing of the first lens moving apparatus10 c may be disposed at two adjacent side portions, among the first tofourth side portions of the first housing.

The sensing magnet SM3 may be disposed at a side surface of the bobbinopposite the first side portion of the first housing, and the balancingmagnet BM3 may be disposed at a side portion of the bobbin opposite thesecond side portion of the first housing. In addition, positions of thebalancing magnet BM3 and the sensing magnet SM3 may be reversed.

In FIG. 26B, the magnets DM21 to DM24 are disposed at the cornerportions of the first housing, whereby the first lens moving apparatusand the second lens moving apparatus have different coordinate axes forindicating OIS driving directions, and therefore it is necessary tocorrect the position information value of a gyro sensor. As a result,the driving speed of the camera module may be reduced.

Also, in FIG. 26B, the balancing magnet is necessary to offset magneticfield interference of the sensing magnet in the first lens movingapparatus 10 c.

Also, in FIG. 26B, a position sensor must be disposed at the first sideportion of the first housing opposite the side portion of the bobbin atwhich the sensing magnet SM3 is disposed. Since the magnets are disposedat the corners of the first housing adjacent to the first side portionof the first housing, however, a space in which the position sensor isto be mounted is not sufficient. Particularly, an integrated AF driverIC including a Hall sensor and a driver may not be mounted at the firsthousing, since the volume thereof is large.

According to the embodiment, on the other hand, in the camera moduleincluding two or more lens moving apparatuses, a dummy member 135 isdisposed, but no magnet for AF or OIS is disposed, at one of twoadjacent side portions of two housings of two adjacent lens movingapparatuses. Consequently, it is possible to reduce effects on AFdriving force and OIS driving force due to magnetic field interferencebetween magnets included in the two adjacent lens moving apparatuses,and therefore it is possible to secure reliability in AF operation andOIS operation.

Since the embodiment includes three magnets, the cost of the magnets maybe reduced.

In addition, since the embodiment includes three magnets, the thirdmagnet 130-3 serves as the balancing magnet even though the balancingmagnet is not disposed at the side portion of the bobbin opposite theside portion of the bobbin at which the sensing magnet is located,whereby it is possible to obtain the effect of offsetting the magneticfield interference of the sensing magnet.

Also, in the embodiment, it is possible to secure a sufficient space tomount the position sensor therein since no magnet is disposed at thefourth side portion 141-4 of the housing.

Also, in the embodiment, in the case in which the magnets are disposedas shown in FIG. 22, it is not necessary to convert a gyro value of thegyro sensor, whereby it is possible to increase driving speed of thecamera module.

FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a lens moving apparatus 3100 accordingto another embodiment, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of thelens moving apparatus 3100 of FIG. 27, FIG. 29 is an explodedperspective view of a first AF mover 5200 a and a second AF mover 5200 bof FIG. 28, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of an OIS mover5300, FIG. 31A is an exploded perspective view of a stator 5400 of FIG.28, FIG. 31B is a bottom view of a base 3210 of FIG. 31A, FIG. 32 is anexploded perspective view of a first elastic member 5500 a and a secondelastic member 5500 b of FIG. 28, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of thelens moving apparatus 3100 of FIG. 27 with a cover member 3300 removed,FIG. 34 is a partial enlarged view of FIG. 33, and FIG. 35 is asectional view of FIG. 27 when viewed in an X-Y direction.

For example, the lens moving apparatus 3100 of FIG. 27 may be referredto as a “dual lens moving apparatus” since two lens modules can bemounted. Also, in the following description, the “coil” may refer to acoil unit, and the “elastic member” may refer to an elastic unit or aspring.

Referring to FIGS. 27 to 35, the lens moving apparatus 3100 may includea cover member 3300, a first AF mover 5200 a, a second AF mover 5200 b,an OIS mover 5300, a stator 5400, a first elastic member 5500 a, asecond elastic member 5500 b, and a sensor 5800.

In addition, the lens moving apparatus 3100 may further include asupporting member 3600 and a damper 5700.

In another embodiment, however, at least one of the cover member 3300,the first AF mover 5200 a, the second AF mover 5200 b, the OIS mover5300, the stator 5400, the first elastic member 5500 a, the secondelastic member 5500 b, the supporting member 3600, the damper 5700, andthe sensor 5800 may be omitted from the lens moving apparatus 3100. Inparticular, the sensor 5800, which is configured to perform handshakecompensation feedback control, may be omitted.

In the aspect of AF driving, the lens moving apparatus 3100 may includea first lens moving unit and a second lens moving unit. For example, thefirst lens moving unit may include a first magnet unit including a firstAF mover 5200 a and first to third magnets 3130-1 to 3130-3.

In addition, for example, the second lens moving unit may include asecond magnet unit including a second AF mover 5200 b and fourth tosixth magnets 3130-4 to 3130-6.

The cover member 3300 may define the external appearance of the lensmoving apparatus 3100.

The cover member 3300 may have a hexahedral shape open at the lower partthereof. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. The covermember 3300 may be made of a nonmagnetic material. In the case in whichthe cover member 3300 is made of a nonmagnetic material, the magnets3130 may be affected by magnetic force of the cover member 3300. Thecover member 3300 may be made of a metal material.

More specifically, a metal sheet may be used as the cover member 3300.In this case, the cover member 3300 may block electromagneticinterference (EMI). Due to such a characteristic of the cover member3300, the cover member 3300 may be called an “EMI shield can.”

The cover member 3300 may prevent electromagnetic waves generatedoutside the lens moving apparatus from being introduced inside the covermember 3300. In addition, the cover member 3300 may preventelectromagnetic waves generated outside the lens moving apparatus frombeing discharged outside the cover member 3300.

The cover member 3300 may include an upper plate 3301 and a side plate3302.

The cover member 3300 may include an upper plate 3301 and a side plate3302 bent and extending from the upper plate 3301. The cover member 3300may include an upper plate 3301 and a side plate 3302 extendingdownwards from the outer periphery of the upper plate 3301.

The cover member 3300 may be coupled to a base 3210. For example, aportion of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300 may be coupledto the base 3210.

The lower end of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300 may bedisposed at a step portion 3211 of the base 3210. The lower end of theside plate 3302 may be coupled to the base 3210. The inner surface ofthe side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300 may directly contact theouter surface of the base 3210.

The inner surface of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300 may becoupled to the base 3210 using an adhesive (not shown). In anotherexample, the cover member 3300 may be directly coupled to the uppersurface of a circuit board 5010.

At least one of the first AF mover 5200 a, the second AF mover 5200 b,the OIS mover 5300, the stator 5400, the first elastic member 5500 a,the second elastic member 5500 b, and the supporting member 3600 may bedisposed in an inner space defined by the cover member 3300 and the base3210. In this structure, it is possible for the cover member 3300 toprotect internal components from external impact and to preventpermeation of external contaminants. The cover member 3300 may beintegrally formed.

The cover member 3300 may include a first opening 3302 a and a secondopening 3302 b. For example, each of the first opening 3302 a and thesecond opening 3302 b may be a through hole formed through the upperplate 3301 of the cover member 3300.

The cover member 3300 may be provided in the upper plate 3301 thereofwith a first opening 3302 a formed at a position corresponding to afirst bobbin 3110 a and a second opening 3302 b formed at a positioncorresponding to a second bobbin 3110 b.

The openings 3302 a and 3302 b of the cover member 3300 may be formed inthe upper plate 3301 of the cover member 3300 so as to be spaced apartfrom each other. The first opening 3302 a of the cover member 3300 mayexpose a first lens module mounted in the first bobbin 3110 a, and thesecond opening 3302 b of the cover member 3300 may expose a second lensmodule mounted in the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first opening 3302 a of the cover member 3300 may be formed in ashape corresponding to the shape of the first lens module, and thesecond opening 3302 b of the cover member 3300 may be formed in a shapecorresponding to the shape of the second lens module.

The size (e.g. the diameter) of each of the first and second openings3302 a and 3302 b of the cover member 3300 may be greater than thediameter of a corresponding one of the lens modules such that the lensmodules can be assembled through the openings 3302 a and 3302 b.

Light introduced through each of the first and second openings 3302 aand 3302 b of the cover member 3300 may pass through a corresponding oneof the lens modules. At this time, the light, after passing through eachlens module, may be converted into an electrical signal by an imagesensor in order to acquire an image.

The first AF mover 5200 a and the second AF mover 5200 b will bedescribed.

The first AF mover 5200 a is coupled to the first lens module, orreceives the first lens module therein. The second AF mover 5200 b iscoupled to the second lens module, or receives the second lens moduletherein.

Each of the first AF mover 5200 a and the second AF mover 5200 b may bemoved through interaction with the OIS mover 5300 and/or the stator5400. At this time, the first AF mover 5200 a may be moved integrallywith or together with the first lens module in order to perform anautofocus function, and the second AF mover 5200 b may be movedintegrally with or together with the second lens module. However, thesecond AF mover 5200 b may be moved separately from the first AF mover5200 a. The movement direction of the second AF mover 5200 b and themovement direction of the first AF mover 5200 a may be parallel to eachother.

For example, the outer peripheral surface of the first lens module maybe coupled to the inner peripheral surface of the first AF mover 5200 a,and the outer peripheral surface of the second lens module may becoupled to the inner peripheral surface of the second AF mover 5200 b.

The first AF mover 5200 a may include the first bobbin 3110 a and acomponent configured to be moved with the first bobbin 3110 a, and thesecond AF mover 5200 b may include the second bobbin 3110 b and acomponent configured to be moved with the second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the first AF mover 5200 a may include the first bobbin 3110a and a first coil 3120 a, and the second AF mover 5200 b may includethe second bobbin 3110 b and a second coil 3120 b.

However, at least one of the first bobbin 3110 a and the first coil 3120a may be omitted from the first AF mover 5200 a or may be changed, andat least one of the second bobbin 3110 b and the second coil 3120 b maybe omitted from the second AF mover 5200 b or may be changed.

The first bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b may be disposed ata housing 3140 of the OIS mover 5300.

For example, the first bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b may bedisposed at the housing 3140 in the state of being spaced apart fromeach other so as to be moved in the first direction.

The first bobbin 3110 a may be disposed in a first receiving unit 3011 aof the housing 3140, and the second bobbin 3110 b may be disposed in asecond receiving unit 3011 b of the housing 3140.

Each of the first bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b may bemoved relative to the housing 3140 in an optical-axis direction.

The first bobbin 3110 a may be disposed in the first receiving unit 3011a of the housing 3140 so as to be moved along a first optical axis, andthe second bobbin 3110 b may be disposed in the second receiving unit3011 b of the housing 3140 so as to be moved along a second opticalaxis.

The first bobbin 3110 a may have a first opening 3111 a for couplingwith the first lens module, and the first opening 3111 a may be athrough hole formed through the center of the first bobbin 3110 a.

The second bobbin 3110 b may have a second opening 3111 b for couplingwith the second lens module, and the second opening 3111 b may be athrough hole formed through the center of the second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the outer peripheral surface of the first lens module maybe coupled to the inner peripheral surface of the first bobbin 3110 aformed by the first opening 3111 a, and the outer peripheral surface ofthe second lens module may be coupled to the inner peripheral surface ofthe second bobbin 3110 b formed by the second opening 3111 b.

For example, a screw thread corresponding to a screw thread formed atthe outer peripheral surface of the first lens module may be formed atthe inner peripheral surface of the first opening 3111 a, and a screwthread corresponding to a screw thread formed at the outer peripheralsurface of the second lens module may be formed at the inner peripheralsurface of the second opening 3111 b.

For example, the first lens module may be screw-engaged with the firstopening 3111 a of the first bobbin 3110 a, and the second lens modulemay be screw-engaged with the second opening 3111 b of the second bobbin3110 b.

For example, an adhesive may be disposed between the first lens moduleand the first bobbin 3110 a and between the second lens module and thesecond bobbin 3110 b. At this time, the adhesive may be epoxy hardenedby at least one of ultraviolet (UV) light, heat, and laser.

The first coil 3120 a may be disposed at the first bobbin 3110 a, andthe second coil 3120 b may be disposed at the second bobbin 3110 b. Thefirst coil 3120 a may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110 a, and thesecond coil 3120 b may be coupled to the second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the first coil 3120 a may be coupled to the outer surfaceof the first bobbin 3110 a, and the second coil 3120 b may be coupled tothe outer surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first bobbin 3110 a may be provided at the outer surface thereofwith a first driving unit coupling portion 3212 a, at which the firstcoil 3120 a is disposed or to which the first coil 3120 a is coupled,and the second bobbin 3110 b may be provided at the outer surfacethereof with a second driving unit coupling portion 3212 b, at which thesecond coil 3120 b is disposed or to which the second coil 3120 b iscoupled.

The first driving unit coupling portion 3212 a may be formed as a recessdepressed inwardly from at least a portion of the outer surface of thefirst bobbin 3110 a, and the second driving unit coupling portion 3212 bmay be formed as a recess depressed inwardly from at least a portion ofthe outer surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

At least a portion of the first coil 3120 a may be received in the firstdriving unit coupling portion 3212 a, and at least a portion of thesecond coil 3120 b may be received in the second driving unit couplingportion 3212 b.

The first driving unit coupling portion 3212 a may be formed integrallywith the outer surface of the first bobbin 3110 a, and the seconddriving unit coupling portion 3212 b may be formed integrally with theouter surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the first driving unit coupling portion 3212 a may becontinuously formed along the outer surface of the first bobbin 3110 a,and the second driving unit coupling portion 3212 b may be continuouslyformed along the outer surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the first coil 3120 a may be wound around the first drivingunit coupling portion 3212 a, and the second coil 3120 b may be woundaround the second driving unit coupling portion 3212 b. In anotherexample, the first driving unit coupling portion 3212 a may include aplurality of first driving unit coupling portions spaced apart from eachother, and the first coil 3120 a may include a plurality of coil unitsdisposed at the plurality of first driving unit coupling portions. Inaddition, the second driving unit coupling portion 3212 b may include aplurality of second driving unit coupling portions spaced apart fromeach other, and the second coil 3120 b may include a plurality of coilunits disposed at the plurality of second driving unit couplingportions.

A first coupling portion 3113 a configured to be coupled to an innerportion 3512 a of a first upper elastic member 5510 a may be formed atthe upper surface of the first bobbin 3110 a, and a first couplingportion 3113 b configured to be coupled to an inner portion 3512 b of asecond upper elastic member 5510 b may be formed at the upper surface ofthe second bobbin 3110 b.

For example, the first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin 3110a may be coupled to a second coupling hole 3151 a formed in the innerportion 3512 a of the first upper elastic member 5510 a, and the firstcoupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin 3110 b may be coupled to asecond coupling hole 3151 b formed in the inner portion 3512 b of thesecond upper elastic member 5510 b.

The first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin 3110 a may beformed as the result of a portion of the upper surface of the firstbobbin 3110 a being depressed, and the first coupling portion 3113 b ofthe second bobbin 3110 b may be formed as the result of a portion of theupper surface of the second bobbin 3110 b being depressed.

For coupling with the first and second upper elastic members 5510 a and5510 b, each of the first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin3110 a and the first coupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin 3110 bmay receive an adhesive therein.

The first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin 3110 a may beformed at a position corresponding to the second coupling hole 3151 aformed in the inner portion 3512 a of the first upper elastic member5510 a. The first coupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin 3110 bmay be formed at a position corresponding to the second coupling hole3151 b formed in the inner portion 3512 b of the second upper elasticmember 5510 b.

The first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin 3110 a may beformed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the second coupling hole3151 a formed in the inner portion 3512 a of the first upper elasticmember 5510 a. The first coupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin3110 b may be formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the secondcoupling hole 3151 b formed in the inner portion 3512 b of the secondupper elastic member 5510 b.

In addition, the first coupling portion 3113 a or 3113 b of each of thefirst bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b may be a recess.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,each coupling portion may be a protrusion or have a planar shape.

A second coupling portion (not shown) for coupling with an inner portion3522 a of a first lower elastic member 5520 a may be formed at the lowersurface of the first bobbin 3110 a, and a second coupling portion (notshown) for coupling with an inner portion 3522 b of a second lowerelastic member 5520 b may be formed at the lower surface of the secondbobbin 3110 b.

For example, the second coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 a maybe coupled to a third coupling hole 3161 a formed in the inner portion3522 a of the first lower elastic member 5520 a, and the second couplingportion of the second bobbin 3110 b may be coupled to a third couplinghole 3161 b formed in the inner portion 3522 b of the second lowerelastic member 5520 b.

The second coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 a may be formed asthe result of a portion of the lower surface of the first bobbin 3110 abeing depressed, and the second coupling portion of the second bobbin3110 b may be formed as the result of a portion of the lower surface ofthe second bobbin 3110 b being depressed.

For coupling with the first and second lower elastic members 5520 a and5520 b, each of the second coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 aand the second coupling portion of the second bobbin 3110 b may receivean adhesive therein.

The second coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 a may be formed ata position corresponding to the third coupling hole 3161 a formed in theinner portion 3522 a of the first lower elastic member 5520 a. Thesecond coupling portion of the second bobbin 3110 b may be formed at aposition corresponding to the third coupling hole 3161 b formed in theinner portion 3522 b of the second lower elastic member 5520 b.

The second coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 a may be formed ina shape corresponding to the shape of the third coupling hole 3161 aformed in the inner portion 3522 a of the first lower elastic member5520 a. The second coupling portion of the second bobbin 3110 b may beformed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the third coupling hole3161 b formed in the inner portion 3522 b of the second lower elasticmember 5520 b.

In another embodiment, at least one of the driving unit coupling portion3212 a or 3212 b, the first coupling portion 3113 a or 3113 b, and thesecond coupling portion may be omitted from each of the first bobbin3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first coil 3120 a may be disposed at the first bobbin 3110 a, andthe second coil 3120 b may be disposed at the second bobbin 3110 b. Forexample, the first coil 3120 a may be disposed at the outer surface ofthe first bobbin 3110 a, and the second coil 3120 b may be disposed atthe outer surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first coil 3120 a may be opposite a first magnet unit 3130 a, andthe second coil 3120 b may be opposite a second magnet unit 3130 b.

When a first driving signal (e.g. first current) is supplied to thefirst coil 3120 a, the first coil 3120 a and the first bobbin 3110 a maybe moved in a first optical-axis (OA1) direction due to electromagneticinteraction between the first coil 3120 a and the first magnet unit 3130a.

In addition, when a second driving signal (e.g. second current) issupplied to the second coil 3120 b, the second coil 3120 b and thesecond bobbin 3110 b may be moved in a second optical-axis (OA2)direction due to electromagnetic interaction between the second coil3120 b and the second magnet unit 3130 b.

For example, the first coil 3120 a may be a single integrated coil, andthe second coil 3120 b may be a single integrated coil.

In another example, the first coil 3120 a may include a plurality ofcoil units spaced apart from each other, and the second coil 3120 b mayinclude a plurality of coil units spaced apart from each other.

For example, the first coil 3120 a may include four coil units spacedapart from each other, and the four coil units may be disposed at theouter surface of the first bobbin 3110 a such that the angle between twoadjacent coil units is 90 degrees. In addition, for example, the secondcoil 3120 b may include four coil units spaced apart from each other,and the four coil units may be disposed at the outer surface of thesecond bobbin 3110 b such that the angle between two adjacent coil unitsis 90 degrees.

The first coil 3120 a may include a pair of first lead wires for supplyof first electric power or a first driving signal, and the second coil3120 b may include a pair of second lead wires for supply of secondelectric power or a second driving signal.

For example, the pair of first lead wires of the first coil 3120 a maybe connected to first and second upper elastic units 3510 a and 3510 bof the first upper elastic member 5510 a. In addition, the pair ofsecond lead wires of the second coil 3120 b may be connected to thirdand fourth upper elastic units 3510 c and 3510 d of the second upperelastic member 5510 b.

The first coil 3120 a may receive the first electric power or the firstdriving signal via the first upper elastic member 5510 a, and the secondcoil 3120 b may receive the second electric power or the second drivingsignal via the second upper elastic member 5510 b.

For example, the first coil 3120 a may receive the first electric poweror the first driving signal via a circuit board 3250, the supportingmember 3600, and the first upper elastic member 5510 a, and the secondcoil 3120 b may receive the second electric power or the second drivingsignal via the circuit board 3250, the supporting member 3600, and thesecond upper elastic member 5510 b.

Referring to FIG. 28, the OIS mover 5300 may receive at least a portionof the first AF mover 5200 a and the second AF mover 5200 b therein.

The OIS mover 5300 may move the first and second AF movers 5200 a and5200 b or may be moved with the first and second AF movers 5200 a and5200 b. The OIS mover 5300 may be moved through interaction with thestator 5400.

The OIS mover 5300 may be moved to perform a handshake compensationfunction. When moved to perform the handshake compensation function, theOIS mover 5300 may be moved integrally with the AF movers 5200 a and5200 b.

The OIS mover 5300 may include a housing 3140 and a magnet 3320.However, at least one of the housing 3140 and the magnet 3320 may beomitted from the OIS mover 5300 or may be changed.

The housing 3140 may be disposed outside the first and second bobbins3110 a and 3110 b. The housing 3140 may receive at least a portion ofthe first and second bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b and the magnet 3320therein.

The first and second bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b may be disposed in thehousing 3140, and the magnet may be disposed at the housing 3140.

The housing 3140 may include four side surfaces and four corner portionsdisposed between the four side surfaces. For example, the housing 3140may include a hexahedral shape.

The magnet 3320 may be disposed at the four side surfaces of the housing3140.

At least a portion of the outer surface of the housing 3140 may beformed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the inner peripheralsurface of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300. The outersurface of the housing 3140 may be formed in a shape corresponding tothe shape of the inner peripheral surface of the side plate 3302 of thecover member 3300.

The housing 3140 may be made of an insulative material. The housing 3140may be made of a material different from the cover member 3300. Thehousing 3140 may be made of an injection molded material inconsideration of productivity.

For example, for OIS driving, the outer surface of the housing 3140 maybe spaced apart from the inner surface of the side plate 3302 of thecover member 3300. That is, for OIS driving, the housing 3140 may bemoved in a space between the housing 3140 and the cover member 3300.

The upper elastic members 5510 a and 5510 b may be coupled to the upperpart, the upper end, or the upper surface of the housing 3140, and thelower elastic members 5520 a and 5520 b may be coupled to the lowerpart, the lower end, or the lower surface of the housing 3140.

The housing 3140 may be integrally formed. That is, in the embodiment,the OIS mover 1300 may be singly controlled while the first and secondAF movers 5200 a and 5200 b for AF driving may be separately controlled.

In other words, in the embodiment, the first lens module and the secondlens module may be moved individually at the time of AF driving andintegrally at the time of OIS driving. Through the embodiment, mutualinterference between the magnets in the dual VCN structure for OIS maybe excluded.

In the embodiment, each of the housing 3140, the base 3210, and thecircuit board 3250 may be integrally formed.

The housing 3140 may include a first receiving unit 3011 a, in which thefirst bobbin 3110 a is received or seated, and a second receiving unit3011 b, in which the second bobbin 3110 b is received or seated.

In addition, the housing 3140 may further include a connection unit 3011c disposed between the first receiving unit 3011 a and the secondreceiving unit 3011 b so as to interconnect the first receiving unit3011 a and the second receiving unit 3011 b.

The first receiving unit 3011 a and the second receiving unit 3011 b maybe formed inside the housing 3140.

Each of the first receiving unit 3011 a and the second receiving unit3011 b may include a through hole formed through the housing 3140 in thevertical direction. For example, the first receiving unit 3011 a mayinclude a first opening or a first through hole, in which the firstbobbin 3110 a is received, and the second receiving unit 3011 b mayinclude a second opening or a second through hole, in which the secondbobbin 3110 b is received.

The first bobbin 3110 a may be movably disposed in the first receivingunit 3011 a, and the second bobbin 3110 b may be movably disposed in thesecond receiving unit 3011 b.

At least a portion of the first receiving unit 3011 a may be formed in ashape corresponding to the shape of the first bobbin 3110 a, and atleast a portion of the second receiving unit 3011 b may be formed in ashape corresponding to the shape of the second bobbin 3110 b.

The inner surface of the first receiving unit 3011 a formed by the firstthrough hole may be located so as to be spaced apart from the outersurface of the first bobbin 3110 a, and the inner surface of the secondreceiving unit 3011 b formed by the second through hole may be locatedso as to be spaced apart from the outer surface of the second bobbin3110 b.

The first bobbin 3110 a may have a first projecting portion or a firststopper 3115 a (see FIG. 29) projecting outwards from the outer surfaceof the first bobbin 3110 a, and the second bobbin 3110 b may have asecond projecting portion or a second stopper 3115 b (see FIG. 29)projecting outwards from the outer surface of the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first projecting portion 3115 a of the first bobbin 3110 a and/orthe second projecting portion 3115 b of the second bobbin 3110 b maycontact the housing 3140 or a first recessed portion 3146 a (see FIG.30) and/or a second recessed portion 3146 b formed at the upper surfaceof the housing 3140 so as to serve as stoppers that mechanically limitthe movement of the first bobbin 3110 a in the first optical-axis (OA1)direction and the movement of the second bobbin 3110 b in the secondoptical-axis (OA2) direction.

The connection unit 3011 c of the housing 3140 may be disposed betweenthe first bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110 b.

The housing 3140 may include a plurality of side portions 3014 a to 3014d and 3015 a to 3015 d and a plurality of corner portions.

Each of the corner portions of the housing 3140 may be disposed betweentwo adjacent side portions and may interconnect two adjacent sideportions of the housing 3140.

For example, the first receiving unit 3011 a of the housing 3140 mayinclude first to fourth side portions 3014 a to 3014 d. In addition, thesecond receiving unit 3011 b of the housing 3140 may include fifth toeighth side portions 3015 a to 3015 d.

In addition, the first receiving unit 3011 a of the housing 3140 mayinclude a corner portion configured to interconnect two adjacent sideportions, among the first to fourth side portions 3014 a to 3014 d, andthe second receiving unit 3011 b of the housing 3140 may include acorner portion configured to interconnect two adjacent side portions,among the fifth to eighth side portions 3015 a to 3015 d.

Each of the first to fourth side portions 3014 a to 3014 d of the firstreceiving unit 3011 a may be formed parallel to a corresponding one ofside surfaces of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300.

Each of the fifth to eighth side portions 3015 a to 3015 d of the secondreceiving unit 3011 b may be formed parallel to a corresponding one ofside surfaces of the side plate 3302 of the cover member 3300.

The first side portion 3014 a and the second side portion 3014 b of thefirst receiving unit 3011 a of the housing 3140 may be opposite eachother, and the third side portion 3014 c and the fourth side portion3014 d may be opposite each other. In addition, the fifth side portion3015 a and the sixth side portion 3015 b of the second receiving unit3011 b of the housing 3140 may be opposite each other, and the seventhside portion 3015 c and the eighth side portion 3015 d may be oppositeeach other.

In addition, the first side portion 3014 a and the fifth side portion3015 a of the housing 3140 may be parallel to each other or may extendin a parallel direction, the second side portion 3014 b and the sixthside portion 3015 b of the housing 3140 may be parallel to each other ormay extend in a parallel direction, and the third side portion 3014 cand the seventh side portion 3015 c of the housing 3140 may be parallelto each other or may extend in a parallel direction.

The magnet 3320 may be disposed at the first to third side portions 3014a to 3014 c and the fifth and seventh side portions 3015 a to 3015 c ofthe housing 3140.

Seating portions 3312, to which the magnet 3320 is coupled, may beprovided in the first to third side portions 3014 a to 3014 c and thefifth and seventh side portions 3015 a to 3015 c of the housing 3140.For example, the seating portions 3312 may be formed in the innersurfaces of the side portions 3014 a to 3014 d and 3015 a to 3015 d ofthe housing 3140.

For example, the seating portions 3312 may be recesses formed as theresult of the inner surfaces of the housing 3140 being depressed.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,each of the seating portions 3312 may have a planar shape, rather thanthe recess.

Each of the seating portions 3312 of the housing 3140 may be open at thelower part thereof. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Inanother embodiment, the lower part of each of the seating portions 3312may not be open.

The magnet 3320 may be fixed or attached to the seating portions 3312 ofthe housing 3140 using an adhesive. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. The housing 3140 may have at least one adhesiveinjection hole 3315 a, through which an adhesive configured to fix themagnet 3320 is injected.

For example, the adhesive injection hole 3315 a may be formed in atleast one of the side portions 3014 a to 3014 d of the first receivingunit 3011 a, the side portions 3015 a to 3015 d of the second receivingunit 3011 b, and side portions of the connection unit 3011 c. Theadhesive injection hole 3315 a may be formed through the side portion ofthe housing 3140 in a direction from the outer surface to the innersurface of the side portion of the housing 3140, and a portion of themagnet 3320 may be exposed by the adhesive injection hole. In anotherembodiment, the adhesive injection hole may be formed as a groove.

The housing 3140 may include first coupling portions 3313 configured tobe coupled to the first and second upper elastic members 5510 a and 5510b and second coupling portions (not shown) configured to be coupled tothe first and second lower elastic members 5520 a and 5520 b.

The first coupling portions 3313 of the housing 3140 may be coupled toouter portions 3511 a and 3511 b of the first and second upper elasticmembers 5510 a and 5510 b.

Each of the first coupling portions 3313 of the housing 3140 may be aprotrusion protruding from the upper surface of the housing 3140.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment,each first coupling portion may be a recess or have a planar shape, andmay be coupled to the upper elastic members using an adhesive.

For example, the first coupling portions 3313 of the housing 3140 may becoupled to first coupling holes 3152 a of the outer portions 3511 a and3511 b of the first and second upper elastic members 5510 a and 5510 b.

For example, the first coupling portions 3313 may be thermally fused inthe state in which the first coupling portions 3313 are inserted intothe first coupling holes 3152 a, whereby the upper elastic members 5510a and 5510 b may be fixed between the thermally fused first couplingportions 3313 and the housing 3140.

The second coupling portions of the housing 3140 may be coupled to outerportions 3521 a and 3521 b of the first and second lower elastic members5520 a and 5520 b.

For example, each of the second coupling portions of the housing 3140may be a protrusion or a recess, or may have a planar shape formed atthe lower surface of the housing 3140, and the second coupling portionsmay be coupled to the lower elastic members by thermal fusion or usingan adhesive. In addition, for example, planes or holes for coupling withthe second coupling portions of the housing 3140 may be provided at theouter portions 3521 a and 3521 b of the first and second lower elasticmembers 5520 a and 5520 b.

The housing 3140 may include recessed portions 3319 formed as the resultof a portion of the upper surface of the housing 3140 being depressed.The recessed portions 3319 may be formed in the corners or the cornerportions of the housing 3140.

The recessed portions 3319 of the housing 3140 may partially overlapcoupling portions 3514 a and 3514 b of the upper elastic members 5510 aand 5510 b in the optical-axis direction. In this structure, even thoughthe damper 5700 coated on the coupling portions 3514 a and 3514 b of theupper elastic members 5510 a and 5510 b flows downwards, the recessedportions 3319 of the housing 3140 may receive the damper.

The housing 3140 may be provided in each of the corners or the cornerportions thereof with a through hole 3147, through which the supportingmember 3600 extends. The through hole 3147 may be formed through atleast a portion of each of the corners or the corner portions of thehousing 3140.

The magnet 3320 may be disposed at the housing 3140. The magnet 3320 maybe disposed outside the first coil 3120 a and the second coil 3120 b.

The magnet 3320 may be opposite the first coil 3120 a and the secondcoil 3120 b in a direction perpendicular to the optical axes OA1 andOA2. The magnet 3320 may be disposed at the upper side of a third coil3230. The magnet 3320 may be opposite the third coil 3230 in theoptical-axis (OA1 and OA2) directions. The magnet 3320 mayelectromagnetically interact with the third coil 3230. The magnet 3320may be used in common to perform an autofocus function and a handshakecompensation function.

The magnet 3320 may be disposed at the side portion of the housing 3140.

The magnet 3320 may be a flat magnet. The magnet 3320 may have a flatshape.

The magnet 3320 may include a first magnet unit 3130 a disposed in thefirst receiving unit 3011 a of the housing 3140 and a second magnet unit3130 b disposed in the second receiving unit 3011 b of the housing 3140.

The first magnet unit 3130 a may move the first bobbin 3110 a in thefirst optical-axis (OA1) direction through interaction with the firstcoil 3120 a, and the second magnet unit 3130 b may move the secondbobbin 3110 b in the second optical-axis (OA2) direction throughinteraction with the second coil 3120 b.

For example, the first magnet unit 3130 a may be disposed around thefirst bobbin 3110 a, and may be disposed opposite the first coil 3120 a.The second magnet unit 3130 b may be disposed around the second bobbin3110 b, and may be disposed opposite the second coil 3120 b.

The first magnet unit 3130 a may include first to third magnets 3130-1to 3130-3, and the second magnet unit 3130 b may include fourth to sixthmagnets 3130-4 to 3130-6.

The first magnet 3130-1 may be disposed at the first side portion 3014 aof the housing 3140, the second magnet 3130-2 may be disposed at thesecond side portion 3014 b of the housing 3140, and the third magnet3130-2 may be disposed at the third side portion 3014 c of the housing3140.

The fourth magnet 3130-4 may be disposed at the fifth side portion 3015a of the housing 3140, the fifth magnet 3130-5 may be disposed at thesixth side portion 3015 b of the housing 3140, and the sixth magnet3130-6 may be disposed at the seventh side portion 3015 c of the housing3140.

In order to prevent magnetic field interference with respect to each ofthe first AF mover and the second AF mover, no magnets may be disposedat the fourth side portion 3014 d of the housing 3140 and the eighthside portion 3015 d of the housing 3140.

That is, in the case in which magnets are disposed at the side portions3014 d and 3015 d of the housing 3140 adjacent to the connection unit3011 c of the housing 3140, an error may occur in autofocus operation ofthe first AF mover and/or autofocus operation of the second AF mover dueto magnetic field interference between the magnets, since the distancebetween the magnets disposed at the side portions 3014 d and 3015 d ofthe housing 3140 is small.

Referring to FIGS. 31A and 31B, the stator 5400 may be disposed at thelower side of the housing 3140.

The stator 5400 may be disposed at the lower side of the OIS mover 5300.The stator 5400 may be opposite the OIS mover 5300.

The stator 5400 may movably support the OIS mover 5300. The stator 5400may move the OIS mover 5300. At this time, the AF movers 5200 a and 5200b may be moved together with the OIS mover 5300.

The stator 5400 may include a circuit member 3231 including a third coil3230, a circuit board 3250, and a base 3210. However, at least one ofthe circuit board 3250, the third coil 3230, and the base 3210 may beomitted from the stator 5400 or may be changed.

The circuit board 3250 may be disposed under the third coil 3230.

For example, the circuit board 3250 may be disposed under the circuitmember 3231 at which the third coil 3230 is formed.

The circuit board 3250 may be disposed on the base 3210.

The circuit board 3250 may be disposed between the circuit member 3231and the base 3210.

The supporting member 3600 may be coupled to the circuit board 3250.

For example, the lower end of the supporting member 3600 may be coupledto the lower surface of the circuit board 3250 by soldering or using aconductive adhesive member. The circuit board 3250 may be integrallyformed.

The circuit board 3250 may include a flexible printed circuit board(FPCB).

The circuit board 3250 may supply first electric power or a firstdriving signal to the first coil 3120 a via the supporting member 3600and the first upper elastic member 5510 a.

The circuit board 3250 may supply second electric power or a seconddriving signal to the second coil 3120 b via the supporting member 3600and the second upper elastic member 5510 b.

The circuit board 3250 may be connected to the third coil 3230, and maysupply third electric power or a third driving signal to the third coil3230.

The circuit board 3250 may include a first opening 3411 a, a secondopening 3411 b, and terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b. However, atleast one of the first opening 3411 a, the second opening 3411 b, andthe terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b may be omitted from the circuitboard 3250 or may be changed.

The first opening 3411 a of the circuit board 3250 may be formed biasedto one side of the circuit board 3250. The second opening 3411 b of thecircuit board 3250 may be formed biased to the other side of the circuitboard 3250. When the circuit board 3250 is viewed from above, thecircuit board 3250 may have a rectangular shape. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto.

Each of the first opening 3411 a and the second opening 3411 b of thecircuit board 3250 may be formed through the circuit board 3250.

The first opening 3411 a of the circuit board 3250 may be formed so asto correspond to the first bobbin 3110 a, and the second opening 3411 bmay be formed so as to correspond to the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first opening 3411 a of the circuit board 3250 may allow light thathas passed through the first lens module to pass therethrough, and thesecond opening 3411 b of the circuit board 3250 may allow light that haspassed through the second lens module to pass therethrough.

Each of the first opening 3411 a and the second opening 3411 b of thecircuit board 3250 may be formed in a circular shape. However, the shapeof the first opening 3411 a is not limited thereto. The first opening3411 a may be spaced apart from the second opening 3411 b.

The terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of the circuit board 3250 may beformed as the result of a portion of the circuit board 3250 being bent.For example, the circuit board 3250 may include a portion bent downwardsfrom the upper surface of the circuit board, and the bent portion mayform terminal portions of the circuit board 3250.

At least a portion of each of the terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b ofthe circuit board 3250 may be exposed outside. The terminal portions3253 a and 3253 b of the circuit board 3250 may be coupled to thecircuit board 5010 of the camera module disposed at the lower side ofthe base 3210 by soldering or using a conductive adhesive member.

The lower end of each of the terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of thecircuit board 3250 may directly contact the circuit board 5010 of thecamera module. The terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of the circuitboard 3250 may be disposed at terminal coupling portions 3434 a and 3434b of the base 3210. Each of the terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b ofthe circuit board 3250 may include a plurality of terminals 3251 forconnection with the outside.

Each of the terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of the circuit board3250 may include a plurality of terminals 3251.

For example, first and second terminals, among the plurality ofterminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250, may be connected to first-axis(e.g. Y-axis) coils 3230-1, 3230-2, 3230-4, and 3230-5 of the third coil3230.

In addition, for example, third and fourth terminals, among theplurality of terminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250, may be connectedto second-axis (e.g. X-axis) coils 3230-3 and 3230-6 of the third coil3230. The first to fourth terminals of the circuit board 3250 may be OISterminals.

In addition, for example, fifth to eighth terminals, among the pluralityof terminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250, may be connected to a firstsensor 3240 a. In addition, for example, ninth to twelfth terminals,among the plurality of terminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250, may beconnected to a second sensor 3240 b. For example, the fifth to twelfthterminals of the circuit board 3250 may be sensor terminals.

In addition, for example, thirteenth and fourteenth terminals, among theplurality of terminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250, may be connectedto the first coil 3120 a. In addition, for example, fifteenth tosixteenth terminals, among the plurality of terminals 3251 of thecircuit board 3250, may be connected to the second coil 3120 b. Forexample, the thirteenth to sixteenth terminals of the circuit board 3250may be AF coil terminals.

For example, the circuit board 3250 may include a first terminal portiondisposed at one of two opposite side portions (or side surfaces) thereofand a second terminal portion disposed at the other of the two oppositeside portions. For example, the first and second terminal portions maybe disposed at two opposite long side portions (or long side surfaces)of the circuit board 3250. Here, the two opposite long side surfaces ofthe circuit board 3250 may correspond to first and second side surfaces3031 a and 3031 b of the circuit member 3231.

For example, eight of the first to sixteenth terminals may be providedat the first terminal portion of the circuit board 3250, and the othereight may be provided at the second terminal portion of the circuitboard 3250.

For example, a first coil negative electrode terminal AF1−, a secondcoil negative electrode terminal AF2−, a first-axis coil negativeelectrode terminal OISX−, a second-axis coil negative electrode terminalOISY−, a first sensor input positive electrode terminal Hall X In+, afirst sensor input negative electrode terminal Hall X In−, a firstsensor output positive electrode terminal Hall X Out+, and a firstsensor output negative electrode terminal Hall X Out− may be provided atthe first terminal portion of the circuit board 3250.

In addition, for example, a first coil positive electrode terminal AF1+,a second coil positive electrode terminal AF2+, a first-axis coilpositive electrode terminal OISX+, a second-axis coil positive electrodeterminal OISY+, a second sensor input positive electrode terminal Hall YIn+, a second sensor input negative electrode terminal Hall Y In−, asecond sensor output positive electrode terminal Hall Y Out+, and asecond sensor output negative electrode terminal Hall Y Out− may beprovided at the second terminal portion of the circuit board 3250.

The circuit board 3250 may be provided with a hole 3250 a, through whichthe supporting member 3600 extends. For example, the hole 3250 a may beprovided at each corner of the circuit board 3250, and may be formedthrough the circuit board 3250. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, the circuit board 3250 may be providedat each corner thereof with an escape recess, rather than the hole 3250a, in order to avoid spatial interference with the supporting member360.

The circuit member 3231 may be disposed at the base 3210.

The circuit member 3231 may be disposed at the circuit board 3250.

The circuit member 3231 may be disposed at the upper surface of thecircuit board 3250.

The circuit member 3231 may be disposed at the lower side of the magnet3320.

The circuit member 3231 may be disposed between the magnet 3320 and thebase 3210.

The circuit member 3231 may include a hole 3231 a, through which thesupporting member 3600 extends.

The circuit member 3231 may be provided in each corner thereof with ahole 3231 a having a shape corresponding to the shape of the hole 3250 aformed in each corner of the circuit board 3250. The hole 3231 a of thecircuit member 3231 may be formed through the circuit member 3231. Inanother embodiment, the circuit member 3231 may have an escape recess,rather than the hole 3231 a.

The circuit member 3231 may be integrally formed. The circuit member3231 may include a board portion 3421 and a third coil 3230. However, atleast one of the board portion 3421 and the third coil 3230 may beomitted from the circuit member 3231 or may be changed.

The board portion 3421 may be a circuit board. For example, the boardportion 3421 may be an FPCB. The third coil 3230 may be integrallyformed at the board portion 3421.

The board portion 3421 may be provided with a hole 3231 a, through whichthe supporting member 3600 extends. In a modification, the supportingmember 3600 may be coupled to the board portion 3421. At this time, thelower surface of the board portion 3421 and the lower end of thesupporting member 3600 may be coupled to each other by soldering.

The circuit member 3231 may include first and second openings 3023 a and3023 b corresponding to the first and second openings 3411 a and 3411 bof the circuit board. For example, the first and second openings 3023 aand 3023 b may be formed in the board portion 3421.

For example, the first opening 3023 a of the circuit board 3231 may beformed so as to correspond to the first bobbin 3110 a, and the secondopening 3023 b may be formed so as to correspond to the second bobbin3110 b.

At least a portion (e.g. the lower end) of the first bobbin 3110 a maybe disposed in the first opening 3023 a of the circuit board 3231 andthe first opening 3411 a of the circuit board 3250. In addition, atleast a portion (e.g. the lower end) of the second bobbin 3110 b may bedisposed in the second opening 3023 b of the circuit board 3231 and thesecond opening 3411 b of the circuit board 3250.

The third coil 3230 may be opposite the magnet 3320 in the firstoptical-axis (OA1) direction or the second optical-axis (OA2) direction.

When third electric power or a third driving signal is supplied to thethird coil 3230, the magnet 3320 may be moved relative to the third coil3230 due to electromagnetic interaction between the third coil 3230 andthe magnet 3320.

The third coil 3230 may move the housing 3140 and the bobbins 3110 a and3110 b relative to the base 3120 in the direction perpendicular to theoptical axis through electromagnetic interaction with the magnet 3320.The third coil 3230 may be a fine pattern coil (FP coil) integrallyformed at the board portion 3421. The third coil 3230 may be formed atthe circuit member 3231 in the form of a fine pattern coil (FP coil).

The third coil 3230 may include a first coil unit 3230-1 opposite thefirst magnet 3130-1, a second coil unit 3230-2 opposite the secondmagnet 3130-2, a third coil unit 3230-3 opposite the third magnet3130-3, a fourth coil unit 3230-4 opposite the fourth magnet 3130-4, afifth coil unit 3230-5 opposite the fifth magnet 3130-5, and a sixthcoil unit 3230-6 opposite the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the firstoptical-axis (OA1) direction or the second optical-axis (OA2) direction.

The first coil unit 3230-1, the second coil unit 3230-2, the fourth coilunit 3230-4, and the fifth coil unit 3230-5 may be a first-axis coilconfigured to move the OIS mover 5300 in a first-axis (e.g. Y-axis)direction.

In addition, the third coil unit 3230-3 and the sixth coil unit 3230-6may be a second-axis coil configured to move the OIS mover 5300 in asecond-axis (e.g. X-axis) direction.

The first-axis (e.g. the Y-axis) direction may be perpendicular to thesecond-axis (e.g. X-axis) direction.

Each of the first axis and the second axis may be perpendicular to thefirst optical axis OA1 of the first lens module coupled to the firstbobbin 3110 a. In addition, each of the first axis and the second axismay be perpendicular to the second optical axis OA2 of the second lensmodule coupled to the second bobbin 3110 b.

The first-axis coil may further include a first connection coilconfigured to interconnect the four coil units 3230-1, 3230-2, 3230-4,and 3230-5 spaced apart from each other.

For example, the coil units 3230-1, 3230-2, 3230-4, and 3230-5 may beconnected to each other in series via the first connection coil. Thatis, the coil units 3230-1, 3230-2, 3230-4, and 3230-5 may be integrallycontrolled. For example, the coil units 3230-1, 3230-2, 3230-4, and3230-5 of the first-axis coil may be controlled by a single drivingsignal.

The second-axis coil may further include a second connection coilconfigured to interconnect the third coil unit 3230-3 and the sixth coilunit 3230-6. The third coil unit 3230-3 and the sixth coil unit 3230-6may be connected to each other in series via the second connection coil.

That is, the third coil unit 3230-3 and the sixth coil unit 3230-6 maybe integrally controlled. For example, the coil units 3230-3 and 3230-6of the second-axis coil may be controlled by a single driving signal.

The first-axis coil may be integrally formed, and the second-axis coilmay be integrally formed.

The first-axis coil and the second-axis coil may be separately orindividually controlled.

The base 3210 may be disposed under the housing 3140. The base 3210 maybe disposed under the circuit board 3250. The circuit board 3250 may bedisposed at the upper surface of the base 3210.

The base 3210 may be coupled to the cover member 3300.

The base 3210 may be disposed on the circuit board 5010 of the cameramodule. However, a separate holder member 3120 may be disposed betweenthe base 3210 and the circuit board 5010. The base 3210 may perform thefunction of a sensor holder that protects the image sensor mounted onthe circuit board 5010. The base 3210 may be integrally formed.

The base 3210 may include a first opening 3431 a, a second opening 3431b, a sensor coupling portion 3433, a terminal coupling portion 3434, anda step portion 3211.

The base 3210 may include a depressed portion 3436 and a partition 3437.However, at least one of the first and second openings 3431 a and 3431b, the sensor coupling portion 3433, the terminal coupling portion 3434,the step portion 3211, the depressed portion 3436, and the partition3437 may be omitted from the base 3210 or may be changed.

The first opening 3431 a of the base 3210 may be formed at a positioncorresponding to the first bobbin 3110 a, and may be a through holeformed through the base 3210. For example, each of the first and secondopenings 3431 a and 3431 b of the base 3210 may be formed through thebase 3210 in the vertical direction.

The second opening 3431 b of the base 3210 may be formed at a positioncorresponding to the second bobbin 3110 b, and may be a through holeformed through the base 3210.

The depressed portion 3436 of the base 3210 may be formed as the resultof a portion of the lower surface of the base 3210 being depressed. Forexample, the depressed portion 3436 may be disposed between the firstopening 3431 a and the second opening 3431 b.

The partition 3437 of the base 3210 may project from the depressedsurface of the depressed portion 3436 to the lower surface of the base3210 between the first opening 3431 a and the second opening 3431 b, andmay extend from one side surface (e.g. first long side surface) to theother side surface (e.g. second long side surface) of the base 3210.

The partition 3437 of the base 3210 may increase stiffness of the base3210. The partition 3437 of the base 3210 may be formed in a dualstructure. In this case, the stiffness of the base 3210 may be moreeffectively increased. The partition 3437 may prevent light to beintroduced into a first image sensor from being introduced into a secondimage sensor through a space formed at the lower side of the base 3210.In addition, the partition 3437 may prevent light to be introduced intothe second image sensor from being introduced into the first imagesensor through the space formed at the lower side of the base 3210. Twopartitions 3437 of the base 3210 may be disposed spaced apart from eachother, whereby a space may be formed between the two partitions 3437.

An infrared filter may be disposed in at least one of the first andsecond openings 3431 a and 3431 b of the base 3210. However, theinfrared filter may be coupled to a separate holder member 1020 disposedat the lower part of the base 3210.

Light passing through the first lens module may be incident on the firstimage sensor through the first opening 3431 a of the base 3210, andlight passing through the second lens module may be incident on thesecond image sensor through the second opening 3431 b of the base 3210.

Each of the first and second openings 3431 a and 3431 b of the base 3210may be formed in a circular shape. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto.

A sensor 3240 may be disposed at the sensor coupling portion 3433 of thebase 3210.

The sensor coupling portion 3433 of the base 3210 may receive at least aportion of the sensor 3240.

The sensor coupling portion 3433 of the base 3210 may be a recess formedas the result of the upper surface of the base 3210 being depresseddownwards.

The sensor coupling portion 3433 of the base 3210 may be formed as aplurality of recesses. In an example, the sensor coupling portion 3433may be formed as two recesses. At this time, the sensor 3240 may bedisposed in each of the two recesses.

The sensor coupling portion 3433 of the base 3210 may include a firstsensor coupling portion 3433 a and a second sensor coupling portion 3433b.

The first sensor coupling portion 3433 a may be formed at a region ofthe upper surface of the base 3210 corresponding to a position at whicha first sensor 3240 a is disposed, and the first sensor 3240 a may bedisposed at the first sensor coupling portion 3433 a.

For example, the first sensor coupling portion 3433 a may be formedbetween the first opening 3431 a of the base 3210 and the long sidesurface of the base 3210, and may be formed adjacent to a region of thebase 3210 located between the first opening 3431 a and the secondopening 3431 b of the base 3210.

Alternatively, for example, the first sensor coupling portion 3433 a maybe formed between the second opening 3431 b of the base 3210 and thelong side surface of the base 3210, and may be formed adjacent to aregion of the base 3210 located between the first opening 3431 a and thesecond opening 3431 b of the base 3210.

The second sensor coupling portion 3433 b may be formed at a region ofthe upper surface of the base 3210 corresponding to a position at whicha second sensor 3240 b is disposed, and the second sensor 3240 b may bedisposed at the second sensor coupling portion.

For example, the second sensor coupling portion 3433 b may be formedbetween the first opening 3431 a (or the second opening 3431 b) of thebase 3210 and the short side surface of the base 3210, and may be formedat a position of the upper surface of the base 3210 corresponding to thecenter of the short side surface of the base 3210.

The terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of the circuit board 3250 may bedisposed at the terminal coupling portion 3434 of the base 3210.

The terminal coupling portion 3434 of the base 3210 may be a recessformed as the result of a portion of one side surface of the base 3210being depressed inwards. At this time, at least a portion of each of theterminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b of the circuit board 3250 may be insurface contact with the terminal coupling portion 3434

The terminal coupling portion 3434 of the base 3210 may include a firstterminal coupling portion 3434 a formed at one side surface (e.g. afirst long side surface) of the base 3210 and a second terminal couplingportion 3434 b formed at the other side surface (e.g. a second long sidesurface) of the base 3210.

The first terminal coupling portion 3434 a of the base 3210 may beformed at a side (e.g. a first long side surface) corresponding to along side, among the side surfaces of the base 3210, when viewed fromabove. The first terminal coupling portion 3434 a may be formed at thecentral part of one side surface of the base 3210.

For example, the first sensor coupling portion 3433 a may be locatedadjacent to the terminal coupling portion 3434 of the base 3210.

The second terminal coupling portion 3434 b of the base 3210 may beopposite the first terminal coupling portion 3434 a, and may be formedin a shape corresponding to the shape of the first terminal couplingportion 3434 a.

The terminal coupling portion 3434 may extend downwards from the lowersurface of the base 3210. Consequently, the lower end of the terminalcoupling portion 3434 may be located lower than the lower surface of thebase 3210.

The width of the terminal coupling portion 3434 may correspond to or beequal to the width of each of the terminal portions 3253 a and 3253 b ofthe circuit board 3250. The length of the terminal coupling portion 3434may correspond to or be equal to the length of a terminal portion 3412of the circuit board 3250.

The step portion 3211 of the base 3210 may be formed at the side surfaceof the base 3210.

The step portion 3211 of the base 3210 may be formed around the outersurface of the base 3210. The step portion 3211 of the base 3210 may beformed as the result of the upper part of the side surface of the base3210 being depressed. Alternatively, the step portion 3211 of the base3210 may be formed as the result of the lower part of the side surfaceof the base 3210 projecting. The lower end of the side plate 3302 of thecover member 3300 may be disposed at the step portion 3211 of the base3210.

The base 3210 may be provided at the upper surface thereof with aprojecting portion 3025 a for coupling with the circuit board 3250 andthe circuit member 3231. For example, the projecting portion 3024 a maybe provided at a region of the upper surface of the base 3210 locatedbetween the first opening and the second opening. However, the presentdisclosure is not limited thereto.

The circuit board 3250 may have a through hole 3025 b for coupling withthe projecting portion 3025 a of the base 3210. For example, the throughhole 3025 b may be disposed between the first opening 3411 a and thesecond opening 3411 b of the circuit board 3250. However, the disclosureis not limited thereto. The through hole may be formed at a positioncorresponding to the projecting portion 3025 a of the base 3210.

The circuit member 3231 may have a through hole 3025 c for coupling withthe projecting portion 3025 a of the base 3210. For example, the throughhole 3025 c may be disposed between the first opening 3023 a and thesecond opening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. The through hole may be formed at aposition corresponding to the projecting portion 3025 a of the base3210. The projecting portion 3025 a of the base 3210 may be coupled tothe through hole 3025 c of the circuit member 3231 and the through hole3025 b of the circuit board 3250, whereby it is possible to prevent thecircuit board 3250 and the circuit member 3231 from being separated fromeach other.

Next, the elastic members 5500 a and 5500 b and the supporting member3600, which are components configured to guide movement of the bobbins3110 a and 3110 b and the housing 3140, will be described. However, thisis merely an example, and members other than a spring and a wire may beused to guide movement of the bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b and the housing3140. In an example, a ball guide may be used instead of the elasticmembers 5500 a and 5500 b and the supporting member 3600.

The first elastic member 5500 a may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110a and the housing 3140. The first elastic member 5500 a may elasticallysupport the first bobbin 3110 a. At least a portion of the first elasticmember 5500 a may be elastic.

The first elastic member 5500 a may movably support the first bobbin3110 a.

The first elastic member 5500 a may support the first bobbin 3110 a soas to be movable relative to the housing 3140 in the optical-axisdirection. That is, the first elastic member 5500 a may support thefirst bobbin 3110 a so as to perform AF driving. At this time, the firstelastic member 5500 a may be called an “AF supporting member.”

The first elastic member 5500 a may include a first upper elastic member5510 a and a first lower elastic member 5520 a. However, at least one ofthe first upper elastic member 5510 a and the first lower elastic member5520 a may be omitted from the first elastic member 5500 a or may bechanged. The first upper elastic member 5510 a and the first lowerelastic member 5520 a may be integrally formed.

The first upper elastic member 5510 a may be disposed at the upper sideof the first bobbin 3110 a, and may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110a and the housing 3140. The first upper elastic member 5510 a may bedisposed at the upper side of the first bobbin 3110 a. The first upperelastic member 5510 a may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110 a and thehousing 3140.

The first upper elastic member 5510 a may be coupled to the upper partof the first bobbin 3110 a and the upper part of the housing 3140. Thefirst upper elastic member 5510 a may be a leaf spring.

The first upper elastic member 5510 a may include first and second upperelastic units 3510 a and 3510 b spaced apart from each other. The firstand second upper elastic units 3510 a and 3510 b may be connected to thefirst coil 3120 a.

The first upper elastic unit 3510 a may be connected to one end of thefirst coil 3120 a, and the second upper elastic unit 3510 b may beconnected to the other end of the first coil 3120 a.

The first upper elastic unit 3510 a may be connected to a first wire3601, and the second upper elastic unit 3510 b may be connected to asecond wire 3602.

The first and second upper elastic units 3510 a and 3510 b may beconnected to the first coil 3120 a. Each of the first and second upperelastic units 3510 a and 3510 b may be made of a conductive material.The first coil 3120 a may receive first electric power or a firstdriving signal (e.g. driving current) through the first and second upperelastic units 3510 a and 3510 b.

The first upper elastic member 5510 a may include a first outer portion3511 a, a first inner portion 3512 a, a first connection portion 3513 a,and a coupling portion 3514 a. The “outer portion” may be referred to asan “outer frame,” and the “inner portion” may be referred to as an“inner frame.”

For example, each of the first and second upper elastic units 3510 a and3510 b may include a first outer portion 3511 a, a first inner portion3512 a, a first connection portion 3513 a, and a coupling portion 3514a.

However, at least one of the first outer portion 3511 a, the first innerportion 3512 a, the first connection portion 3513 a, and the couplingportion 3514 a may be omitted from the first upper elastic member 5510 aor may be changed.

The first outer portion 3511 a may be coupled to the housing 3140. Thefirst outer portion 3511 a may be coupled to the upper part of thehousing 3140.

The first outer portion 3511 a may be coupled to the first couplingportion 3313 of the housing 3140.

The first outer portion 3511 a may include a first coupling hole 3152 acoupled to the first coupling portion 3313 of the housing 3140. Forexample, the first coupling hole 3152 a of the first outer portion 3511a may be coupled to the first coupling portion 3313 of the housing 3140by thermal fusion.

The first inner portion 3512 a may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110a. The first inner portion 3512 a may be coupled to the upper part ofthe first bobbin 3110 a.

The first inner portion 3512 a may be coupled to the first couplingportion 3113 a of the first bobbin 3110 a using an adhesive. The firstinner portion 3512 a may include a second coupling hole 3151 acorresponding to the first coupling portion 3113 a of the first bobbin3110 a.

The first connection portion 3513 a may connect the first outer portion3511 a and the first inner portion 3512 a to each other. The firstconnection portion 3513 a may elastically connect the first outerportion 3511 a and the first inner portion 3512 a to each other. Thefirst connection portion 3513 a may be elastic. At this time, the firstconnection portion 3513 a may be called an “elastic portion.” The firstconnection portion 3513 a may be formed by bending twice or more.

The coupling portion 3514 a may be coupled to the supporting member3600. The coupling portion 3514 a may be coupled to the supportingmember 3600 by soldering. The coupling portion 3514 a may include ahole, through which the supporting member 3600 extends. The hole of thecoupling portion 3514 a may be a through hole.

Consequently, the portion of the supporting member 3600 extendingthrough the coupling portion 3514 a and the upper surface of thecoupling portion 3514 a may be coupled to each other by soldering. Thecoupling portion 3514 a may extend from the first outer portion 3511 a.The coupling portion 3514 a may extend outwards from the first outerportion 3511 a. The coupling portion 3514 a may include a bent portionformed by bending.

Referring to FIG. 34, the coupling portion 3514 a may include a firstextension portion 3514 aa extending from the first outer portion 3511 atoward the corner of the housing 3140 and a second extension portion3514 ab extending from the first extension portion 3514 aa in adirection toward the center of the first upper elastic member 5510 a.

The first extension portion 3514 aa may extend from the first outerportion 3511 a toward the corner of the housing 3140. The secondextension portion 3514 ab may extend from the first extension portion3514 aa in the direction toward the center of the first upper elasticmember 5510 a.

The second extension portion 3514 ab may extend from the first extensionportion 3514 aa in a direction toward the first outer portion 3511 a ofthe first upper elastic member 5510 a. The second extension portion 3514ab and the first outer portion 3511 a may be spaced apart from eachother. However, the second extension portion 3514 ab and the first outerportion 3511 a may be connected to each other via the damper 5700.

The distal end of the coupling portion 3514 a may be spaced apart fromthe first outer portion 3511 a. The damper 5700 may connect the distalend of the coupling portion 3514 a and the first outer portion 3511 a toeach other. The terms “first” and “second,” which are used todistinguish between elements, may be used interchangeably. For example,the first extension portion 3514 aa may be called a “second extensionportion,” and the second extension portion 3514 ab may be called a“first extension portion.” In addition, although the first extensionportion 3514 aa and the second extension portion 3514 ab are describedas constituting a single component together with the coupling portion3514 a, the coupling portion 3514 a may be provided separately from thefirst extension portion 3514 aa and the second extension portion 3514ab. In this case, the coupling portion 3514 a may mean a portiondisposed between the first extension portion 3514 aa and the secondextension portion 3514 ab so as to be coupled to the supporting member3600.

In this embodiment, the upper elastic member 5510 a or 5510 b mayinclude an outer portion 3511 a or 3511 b coupled to the housing 3140,an inner portion 3512 a or 3512 b coupled to the first or second bobbin3110 a or 3110 b, a connection portion 3513 a or 3513 b configured tointerconnect the outer portion 3511 a or 3511 b and the inner portion3512 a or 3512 b, a coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b extending from theouter portion 3511 a or 3511 b, the coupling portion being coupled tothe supporting member 3600, and a first extension portion 3514 ab (seeFIG. 34) extending from the coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b, the firstextension portion being spaced apart from the outer portion 3511 a or3511 b. At this time, the damper 5700 may connect the first extensionportion 3514 ab and the outer portion 3511 a or 3511 b to each other.

The upper elastic member 5510 a or 5510 b may include a second extensionportion 3514 aa (see FIG. 34) extending from the outer portion 3511 a or3511 b toward the corner of the housing 3140, the second extensionportion being connected to the coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b. Thefirst extension portion 3514 ab may extend from the coupling portion3514 a or 3514 b in a direction toward the center of the upper elasticmember 5510 a or 5510 b. The first extension portion 3514 ab may includea portion having a width gradually increased in the direction toward thecenter of the upper elastic member 5510 a or 5510 b.

The first extension portion 3514 ab may be connected to the secondextension portion 3514 aa via the coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b. Thefirst extension portion 3514 ab may include a portion having curvature.A portion of the side surface of the outer portion 3511 a or 3511 bopposite the inner surface of the first extension portion 3514 ab mayinclude a shape corresponding to the shape of the inner surface of thefirst extension portion 3514 ab.

The inner surface of the first extension portion 3514 ab may include aportion having curvature. The housing 3140 may include a recessedportion 3319 formed as the result of a portion of the upper surface ofthe corner of the housing 3140 being depressed.

A portion of the recessed portion 3319 of the housing 3140 may overlapthe coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b in the optical-axis (e.g. OA1 orOA2) direction. The recessed portion 3319 of the housing 3140 may bespaced apart from the coupling portion 3514 a or 3514 b.

In this embodiment, the damper 5700 may be coated on the secondextension portion 3514 ab and the first outer portion 3511 a. As aresult, a resonance phenomenon that may occur at the elastic members5500 a and 5500 b and the supporting member 3600 may be prevented.Furthermore, in this structure, design is easier than in the structurein which the damper 5700 is coated on the coupling portion 3514 a andthe housing 3140 or the supporting member 3600 and the housing 3140. Thereason for this is that the first upper elastic member 5510 a can bemore easily changed in design and manufactured than the housing 3140. Inthis embodiment, on the other hand, each of the second extension portion3514 ab and the first outer portion 3511 a is formed so as to have aplurality of rounded portions in order to maximize contact area with thedamper 5700. That is, the characteristic shapes of the second extensionportion 3514 ab and the first outer portion 3511 a prevent separation ofthe damper 5700.

In the embodiment, two dampers 5700 may be disposed at the first upperelastic member 5510 a, and two dampers may be disposed at the secondupper elastic member 5510 b. The dampers 5700 may be disposed at thefour corners of the housing 3140.

In the embodiment, although not shown, an additional damper may becoated in addition to the dampers 5700. In particular, the damper may becoated on the housing 3140 and the supporting member 3600. Furthermore,the damper may be coated on the housing 3140 and the first and secondupper elastic members 5510 a and 5510 b. In addition, the damper may becoated on the supporting member 3600 and the first and second upperelastic members 5510 a and 5510 b.

At least a portion of the second extension portion 3514 ab may be formedso as to have a width gradually increased in a direction toward thecenter of the first upper elastic member 5510 a. The second extensionportion 3514 ab may include a portion having a width gradually increasedin the direction toward the center of the first upper elastic member5510 a.

One end of the second extension portion 3514 ab may be connected to thefirst extension portion 3514 aa, and the other end of the secondextension portion 3514 ab may be formed as a free end. One end of thecoupling portion 3514 a may be connected to the outer portion 3511 a,and the other end of the coupling portion 3514 a may be spaced apartfrom the outer portion 3511 a. The damper 5700 may be integrallydisposed at the other end of the coupling portion 3514 a and the outerportion 3511 a.

The inner surface of the other end of the second extension portion 3514ab may be curved.

The other end of the second extension portion 3514 ab may be formed soas to be curved.

The portion of the side surface of the first outer portion 3511 aopposite the inner surface of the other end of the second extensionportion 3514 ab may have a shape corresponding to the shape of the innersurface of the other end of the second extension portion 3514 ab. Theportion of the first outer portion 3511 a opposite the other end of thesecond extension portion 3514 ab may have a shape corresponding to theshape of the second extension portion 3514 ab.

The inner surface of the other end of the second extension portion 3514ab may include a portion having curvature. The end surface of the otherend of the second extension portion 3514 ab may be rounded. In the abovestructure, separation of the damper 5700 coated on the second extensionportion 3514 ab may be prevented. That is, in the above structure, thedamper 5700 may be more securely fixed to the second extension portion3514 ab and the first outer portion 3511 a.

The first lower elastic member 5520 a may be disposed at the lower sideof the first bobbin 3110 a, and may be coupled to the first bobbin 3110a and the housing 3140. The first lower elastic member 5510 a may bedisposed at the lower side of the first bobbin 3110 a.

The first lower elastic member 5520 a may be coupled to the first bobbin3110 a and the housing 3140. The first lower elastic member 5520 a maybe coupled to the lower part of the first bobbin 3110 a and the lowerpart of the housing 3140.

The first lower elastic member 5520 a may be a leaf spring. The firstlower elastic member 5520 a may be integrally formed.

The first lower elastic member 5520 a may include a second outer portion3521 a, a second inner portion 3522 a, and a second connection portion3523 a. However, at least one of the second outer portion 3521 a, thesecond inner portion 3522 a, and the second connection portion 3523 amay be omitted from the first lower elastic member 5520 a or may bechanged.

For example, the first lower elastic member 5520 a may include a secondouter portion 3521 a coupled to the housing 3140, a second inner portion3522 a coupled to the first bobbin 3110 a, and a second connectionportion 3523 a configured to interconnect the second outer portion 3521a and the second inner portion 3522 a.

For example, the second outer portion 3521 a may be coupled to the lowerpart of the housing 3140.

The second outer portion 3521 a may be coupled to the second couplingportion of the housing 3140 using an adhesive. The second outer portion3521 a may include a coupling hole 3161 b corresponding to the secondcoupling portion of the housing 3140.

For example, the second inner portion 3522 a may be coupled to the lowerpart of the first bobbin 3110 a.

The second inner portion 3522 a may be coupled to the second couplingportion of the first bobbin 3110 a using an adhesive. The second innerportion 3522 a may include a coupling hole 3161 a corresponding to thesecond coupling portion of the first bobbin 3110 a.

The second connection portion 3523 a may connect the second outerportion 3521 a and the second inner portion 3522 a to each other. Thesecond connection portion 3523 a may elastically connect the secondouter portion 3521 a and the second inner portion 3522 a to each other.The second connection portion 3523 a may be elastic. At this time, thesecond connection portion 3523 a may be called an “elastic portion.” Thesecond connection portion 3523 a may be formed by bending twice or more.

The second elastic member 5500 b may be coupled to the second bobbin3110 b and the housing 3140. The second elastic member 5500 b mayelastically support the second bobbin 3110 b. At least a portion of thesecond elastic member 5500 b may be elastic. The second elastic member5500 b may movably support the second bobbin 3110 b. The second elasticmember 5500 b may support the second bobbin 3110 b so as to be movablerelative to the housing 3140 in the optical-axis direction. That is, thesecond elastic member 5500 b may support the second bobbin 3110 b so asto perform AF driving. At this time, the second elastic member 5500 bmay be called an “AF supporting member.”

The second elastic member 5500 b may include a second upper elasticmember 5510 b and a second lower elastic member 5520 b. However, atleast one of the second upper elastic member 5510 b and the second lowerelastic member 5520 b may be omitted from the second elastic member 5500b or may be changed.

The second upper elastic member 5510 b may be disposed at the upper sideof the second bobbin 3110 b, and may be coupled to the second bobbin3110 b and the housing 3140. The second upper elastic member 5510 b maybe disposed at the upper side of the second bobbin 3110 b. The secondupper elastic member 5510 b may be coupled to the upper part of thesecond bobbin 3110 b and the upper part of the housing 3140. The secondupper elastic member 5510 b may be a leaf spring.

The second upper elastic member 5510 b may include third and fourthupper elastic units 3510 c and 3510 d spaced apart from each other. Thethird and fourth upper elastic units 3510 c and 3510 d may be connectedto the second coil 3120 b.

The third upper elastic unit 3510 c may be connected to one end of thesecond coil 3120 b, and the fourth upper elastic unit 3510 d may beconnected to the other end of the second coil 3120 b.

The third upper elastic unit 3510 c may be connected to a third wire3603, and the fourth upper elastic unit 3510 d may be connected to afourth wire 3604.

The third and fourth upper elastic units 3510 c and 3510 d may beconnected to the second coil 3120 b. Each of the third and fourth upperelastic units 3510 c and 3510 d may be made of a conductive material.The second coil 3120 b may receive second electric power or a seconddriving signal (e.g. driving current) through the third and fourth upperelastic units 3510 c and 3510 d.

The second upper elastic member 5510 b may include an outer portion 3511b, an inner portion 3512 b, a connection portion 3513 b, and a couplingportion 3514 b. However, at least one of the outer portion 3511 b, theinner portion 3512 b, the connection portion 3513 b, and the couplingportion 3514 b may be omitted from the second upper elastic member 5510b or may be changed.

The outer portion 3511 b may be coupled to the housing 3140. The outerportion 3511 b may be coupled to the upper part of the housing 3140. Theouter portion 3511 b may be coupled to the second coupling portion ofthe housing 3140. The outer portion 3511 b may include a coupling holecoupled to the first coupling portion of the housing 3140. The couplinghole of the outer portion 3511 b may be coupled to the second couplingportion of the housing 3140 by thermal fusion.

The inner portion 3512 b may be coupled to the second bobbin 3110 b. Theinner portion 3512 b may be coupled to the upper part of the secondbobbin 3110 b. The inner portion 3512 b may be coupled to the firstcoupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin 3110 b using an adhesive.The inner portion 3512 b may include a coupling hole corresponding tothe first coupling portion 3113 b of the second bobbin 3110 b.

The connection portion 3513 b may connect the outer portion 3511 b andthe inner portion 3512 b to each other. The connection portion 3513 bmay elastically connect the outer portion 3511 b and the inner portion3512 b to each other. The connection portion 3513 b may be elastic. Atthis time, the connection portion 3513 b may be called an “elasticportion.” The connection portion 3513 b may be formed by bending twiceor more.

The coupling portion 3514 b may be coupled to the supporting member3600. The coupling portion 3514 b may be coupled to the supportingmember 3600 by soldering. The coupling portion 3514 b may include ahole, through which the supporting member 3600 extends. Consequently,the portion of the supporting member 3600 extending through the couplingportion 3514 b and the upper surface of the coupling portion 3514 b maybe coupled to each other by soldering. The coupling portion 3514 b mayextend from the outer portion 3511 b. The coupling portion 3514 b mayextend outwards from the outer portion 3511 b. The coupling portion 3514b may include a bent portion formed by bending.

The coupling portion 3514 b of the second upper elastic member 5510 bmay include a first extension portion extending from the outer portion3511 b toward the corner of the housing 3140 and a second extensionportion extending from the first extension portion in a direction towardthe center of the second upper elastic member 5510 b.

The first extension portion of the second upper elastic member 5510 bmay extend from the outer portion 3511 b toward the corner of thehousing 3140. The second extension portion of the second upper elasticmember 5510 b may extend from the first extension portion in thedirection toward the center of the second upper elastic member 5510 b.

The second extension portion of the second upper elastic member 5510 bmay extend from the first extension portion in a direction toward theouter portion 3511 b of the second upper elastic member 5510 b. Thesecond extension portion and the outer portion 3511 b of the secondupper elastic member 5510 b may be spaced apart from each other.However, the second extension portion and the outer portion 3511 b ofthe second upper elastic member 5510 b may be connected to each othervia the damper 5700. That is, the damper 5700 may be coated on thesecond extension portion and the outer portion 3511 b of the secondupper elastic member 5510 b. The function and effect of the damper 5700are the same as described above.

The second lower elastic member 5520 b may be disposed at the lower sideof the second bobbin 3110 b, and may be coupled to the second bobbin3110 b and the housing 3140. The second lower elastic member 5510 b maybe coupled to the lower part of the second bobbin 3110 b and the lowerpart of the housing 3140.

The second lower elastic member 5520 b may be a leaf spring. The secondlower elastic member 5520 b may be integrally formed.

The second lower elastic member 5520 b may include an outer portion 3521b, an inner portion 3522 b, and a connection portion 3523 b. However, atleast one of the outer portion 3521 b, the inner portion 3522 b, and theconnection portion 3523 b may be omitted from the second lower elasticmember 5520 b or may be changed.

The second lower elastic member 5520 b may include an outer portion 3521b coupled to the housing 3140, an inner portion 3522 b coupled to thesecond bobbin 3110 b, and a connection portion 3523 b configured tointerconnect the outer portion 3521 b and the inner portion 3522 b.

The outer portion 3521 b may be coupled to the housing 3140. The outerportion 3521 b may be coupled to the lower part of the housing 3140. Theouter portion 3521 b may be coupled to the second coupling portion ofthe housing 3140 using an adhesive. The outer portion 3521 b may includea coupling hole corresponding to the second coupling portion of thehousing 3140.

For example, the inner portion 3522 b may be coupled to the lower partof the second bobbin 3110 b. The inner portion 3522 b may be coupled tothe second coupling portion of the second bobbin 3110 b using anadhesive. The inner portion 3522 b may include a coupling holecorresponding to the second coupling portion of the second bobbin 3110b.

The connection portion 3523 b may connect the outer portion 3521 b andthe inner portion 3522 b to each other. The connection portion 3523 bmay elastically connect the outer portion 3521 b and the inner portion3522 b to each other. The connection portion 3523 b may be elastic. Atthis time, the connection portion 3523 b may be called an “elasticportion.” The connection portion 3523 b may be formed by bending twiceor more.

Referring to FIGS. 32, 33, and 38, the first and second upper elasticunits 3510 a and 3510 b may be disposed opposite each other in thefirst-axis direction, and the third and fourth upper elastic units 3510c and 3510 d may be disposed opposite each other in the first-axisdirection.

In addition, the first and third upper elastic units 3510 a and 3510 cmay be arranged in a direction parallel to the long side of the circuitmember 3231, and the second and fourth upper elastic units 3510 b and3510 d may be arranged in the direction parallel to the long side of thecircuit member 3231.

In addition, the first and second lower elastic members 5502 a and 5520b may be disposed opposite each other in the second-axis direction, andmay be arranged in the direction parallel to the long side of thecircuit member 3231.

The supporting member 3600 may movably support the housing 3140. Thesupporting member 3600 may elastically support the housing 3140.

At least a portion of the supporting member 3600 may be elastic. Forexample, the supporting member 3600 may support the housing 3140 so asto be movable relative to the stator 5400 in a direction perpendicularto the optical-axis direction. At this time, the bobbins 3110 a and 3110b may be moved integrally with the housing 3140. In another example, thesupporting member 3600 may support the housing 3140 so as to be tiltablerelative to the stator 5400. That is, the supporting member 3600 maysupport the housing 3140 and the bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b so as toperform OIS driving. At this time, the supporting member 3600 may becalled an “OIS supporting member.” In an example, the supporting member3600 may be a wire. In another example, the supporting member 3600 maybe a leaf spring.

The supporting member 3600 may be connected to the first upper elasticmember 5510 a and the circuit board 3250. The supporting member 3600 maybe connected to the second upper elastic member 5510 b and the circuitboard 3250.

The supporting member 3600 may be connected to the upper elastic members5510 a and 5510 b and the stator 5400. The lower end of the supportingmember 3600 may be connected to the circuit board 3250.

For example, the supporting member 3600 may extend through the circuitboard 3250. In this structure, the lower end of the supporting member3600 may be coupled to the lower surface of the circuit board 3250 bysoldering. In a modification, the lower end of the supporting member3600 may be coupled to the lower surface of the circuit member 3231 bysoldering. In a modification, the lower end of the supporting member3600 may be coupled to the board portion 3421 of the circuit member3231. Alternatively, in a modification, the lower end of the supportingmember 3600 may be coupled to the base 3210.

The upper end of the supporting member 3600 may be coupled to thecoupling portions 3514 a and 3514 b of the upper elastic members 5510 aand 5510 b. The upper end of the supporting member 3600 may extendthrough the coupling portions 3514 a and 3514 b of the upper elasticmembers 5510 a and 5510 b. In this structure, the upper end of thesupporting member 3600 may be coupled to the upper surfaces of thecoupling portions 3514 a and 3514 b of the upper elastic members 5510 aand 5510 b by soldering. Alternatively, in a modification, the upper endof the supporting member 3600 may be coupled to the housing 3140.

The structure of the supporting member 3600 is not limited thereto, andthe supporting member may have any structure as long as it is possibleto support the OIS mover 5300 so as to be movable relative to the stator5400.

The supporting member 3600 may be coupled to the second extensionportions 3514 ab of the upper elastic members 5510 a and 5510 b.

The supporting member 3600 may include a plurality of supportingportions or supporting members 3601 to 3604. For example, the supportingmember 3600 may include first to fourth supporting members 3601 to 3604,and each of the first to fourth supporting members 3601 to 3604 may be awire. Each of the first to fourth supporting members 3601 to 3604 may bereferred to as a corresponding one of “first to fourth wires.”

The lower end of each of the supporting members 3601 to 3604 may besoldered to the lower surface of the circuit board 3250. The upper endof each of the supporting members 3601 to 3604 may be soldered to thecoupling portion 3514 a of a corresponding one of the first to fourthupper elastic units 3510 a to 3510 d.

For example, the supporting member 3600 may include a first supportingmember 3601 connected between the first upper elastic unit 3510 a andthe circuit board 3250, a second supporting member 3602 connectedbetween the second upper elastic unit 3510 b and the circuit board 3250,a third supporting member 3603 connected between the third upper elasticunit 3510 c and the circuit board 3250, and a fourth supporting member3604 connected between the fourth upper elastic unit 3510 d and thecircuit board 3250.

The damper 5700 may be made of a viscous material. A resonancephenomenon that may occur at the elastic members 5500 a and 5500 b andthe supporting member 3600 may be prevented by the damper 5700.

The sensor 3240 may be disposed at the stator 5400. The sensor may becoupled to or mounted on the circuit board 3250, and may be connected tothe circuit board 3250. For example, the sensor 3240 may be disposed ormounted on the lower surface of the circuit board 3250.

The sensor 3240 may be disposed at the base 3210. The sensor 3240 may bereceived in the sensor coupling portion 3433 formed in the upper surfaceof the base 3210.

The sensor 3240 may be a Hall sensor. Alternatively, the sensor 3240 maybe a Hall integrated circuit (Hall IC).

The sensor 3240 may sense magnetic force of the magnet 3320. That is,the sensor 3240 may sense a change in magnetic force due to movement ofthe magnet 3320 moving together with the housing 3140, and outputs anoutput (e.g. voltage) based on the result of sensing.

The displacement or position of the housing 3140 may be sensed based onthe output (e.g. voltage) from the sensor 3240. In addition, themovement or tilting of the housing 3140 and/or the bobbins 3110 a and3110 b in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis may be sensedbased on the output from the sensor 3240. Feedback OIS driving may beprovided by the sensor 3240, and the sensor 3240 may be called an “OISfeedback sensor.”

The amount of movement of the housing 3140 in the directionperpendicular to the optical axis may correspond to or may be equal tothe amount of movement of the bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b and the lensmodules coupled to the bobbins 3110 a and 3110 b.

The sensor 3240 may include a plurality of sensors. In an example, twosensors 3240 may be provided to sense x-axis and y-axis (the opticalaxis being the z axis) movement of the housing 3140.

The sensor 3240 may include a first sensor 3240 a configured to sensethe movement of the magnet 3320 in the first-axis direction (e.g. theY-axis direction) and a second sensor 3240 b configured to sense themovement of the magnet 3320 in the second-axis direction (e.g. theX-axis direction). At this time, the first axis and the second axis maybe perpendicular to each other. In addition, the first axis and thesecond axis may be perpendicular to the optical axis.

FIG. 36 is a plan view of a circuit member 3231 according to anembodiment, FIG. 37 is a perspective view of first to sixth coil units3230-1 to 3230-6 and first to sixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6, FIG. 38 isa side view of FIG. 37, and FIG. 39A is a plan view of the first tosixth coil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 and the first to sixth magnets 3130-1to 3130-6.

Referring to FIGS. 36 to 39, the circuit member 3231 may include foursides 3031 a to 3031 d (or side surfaces).

For example, the circuit member 3231 may have a quadrangular (e.g.rectangular) shape including four sides (or side surfaces). However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto.

For example, each of the first and second sides 3031 a and 3031 b of thecircuit member 3231 may be a long side longer than each of the third andfourth sides 3031 c and 3031 d of the circuit member 3231, and each ofthe third and fourth sides 3031 c and 3031 d of the circuit member 3231may be a short side.

First and second openings 3023 a and 3023 b may be arranged in a line ina direction from the third side 3031 c to the fourth side 3031 d of thecircuit member 3231.

The first coil unit 3230-1 may be disposed between the first opening3023 a of the circuit member 3231 and the first side 3031 a of thecircuit member 3231, the second coil unit 3230-2 may be disposed betweenthe first opening 3023 a of the circuit member 3231 and the second side3031 b of the circuit member 3231, and the third coil unit 3230-3 may bedisposed between the first opening 3023 a of the circuit member 3231 andthe third side 3031 c of the circuit member 3231.

In addition, the fourth coil unit 3230-4 may be disposed between thesecond opening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231 and the first side 3031a of the circuit member 3231, the fifth coil unit 3230-5 may be disposedbetween the second opening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231 and thesecond side 3031 b of the circuit member 3231, and the sixth coil unit3230-6 may be disposed between the second opening 3023 b of the circuitmember 3231 and the fourth side 3031 d of the circuit member 3231.

No coil unit may be formed or disposed between the first opening 3023 aand the second opening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231.

Referring to FIG. 37, the lengths, the widths, and the heights of thefirst magnet 3130-1, the second magnet 3130-2, the fourth magnet 3130-4,and the fifth magnet 3130-5 may be equal to each other. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least oneof the lengths, the widths, and the heights may be different from eachother.

In addition, the lengths, the widths, and the heights of the thirdmagnet and the sixth magnet may be equal to each other. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least oneof the lengths, the widths, and the heights may be different from eachother.

In addition, the lengths, the widths, and the heights of the first coilunit 3230-1, the second coil unit 3230-2, the fourth coil unit 3230-4,and the fifth coil unit 3230-5 may be equal to each other. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least oneof the lengths, the widths, and the heights may be different from eachother.

The lengths, the widths, and the heights of the third coil unit 3230-3and sixth coil unit 3230-6 may be equal to each other. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, at least oneof the lengths, the widths, and the heights may be different from eachother.

The lengths L1 and L2, the widths W1 and W2, and the heights H1 and H2of the first magnet 3130-1 and the third magnet 3130-3 will be describedwith reference to FIG. 37.

A description of the length L1, the width W1, and the height H1 of thefirst magnet 3130-1 may be applied to the length, the width, and theheight of each of the second magnet 3130-2, the fourth magnet 3130-4,and the fifth magnet 3130-5.

In addition, a description of the length L2, the width W2, and theheight H2 of the third magnet 3130-3 may be applied to the length, thewidth, and the height of the sixth magnet 3130-6.

The lengths M1 and M2, the widths K1 and K2, and the heights (thelengths or the thicknesses in the optical-axis direction) will also bedescribed with reference to FIG. 37.

A description of the length M1, the width K1, and the height (the lengthor the thickness in the optical-axis direction) of the first coil unit3230-1 may be applied to the length, the width, and the height of eachof the second coil unit 3230-2, the fourth coil unit 3230-4, and thefifth coil unit 3230-5.

In addition, a description of the length M2, the width K2, and theheight (the length or the thickness in the optical-axis direction) ofthe third coil unit 3230-3 may be applied to the length, the width, andthe height of the sixth coil unit 3230-6.

Here, the length L1 or L2 of each of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1to 3130-6 may be the length thereof in a longitudinal direction. Inaddition, the width W1 or W2 of each of the first to sixth magnets3130-1 to 3130-6 may be the length thereof in a width direction.

Here, the width direction may be perpendicular to the longitudinaldirection and may be the direction in which the length of each of thecomponents 3130-1 to 3130-6 is smaller. That is, the length in the widthdirection may be less than the length in the longitudinal direction. Inaddition, the width of each of the components 3130-1 to 3130-6 may bereferred to as the “thickness” of each of the components 3130-1 to3130-6.

For example, the length L1 or L2 of each of the first to sixth magnets3130-1 to 3130-6 may be the length of a first surface of each of thefirst to sixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 opposite the bobbin 3110 in thelongitudinal direction.

In addition, for example, the width W1 or W2 of each of the first tosixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 may be the distance from the firstsurface of each of the components 3130-1 to 3130-6 opposite the bobbin3110 to a second surface thereof opposite the first surface.

In addition, for example, the height H1 or H2 of each of the first tosixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 may be the length of each component inthe optical axis direction.

Alternatively, for example, the height H1 or H2 may be the length of thefirst surface of each of the components 3130-1 to 3130-6 opposite thebobbin 3110 in the vertical direction. Alternatively, for example, theheight H1 or H2 may be the distance from the lower surface to the uppersurface of each of the components 3130-1 to 3130-6.

In addition, the length M1 or M2 of each of the first to sixth coilunits 3230-1 to 3230-6 may be the length thereof in a longitudinaldirection of a corresponding one of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1 to3130-6 or a direction parallel thereto.

For example, M1 or M2 may be the length of each of the first to sixthcoil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 in the longitudinal direction, and may bethe length between the outermost ends of each of the first to sixth coilunits 3230-1 to 3230-6.

In addition, the length X1, X2, or Y1 of each of the first to sixth coilunits 3230-1 to 3230-6 may be the length between opposite ends of theinner portion (or the inner surface) of each of the first to sixth coilunits 3230-1 to 3230-6.

In addition, the width K1 or K2 of each of the first to sixth coil units3230-1 to 3230-6 may be the length thereof in a width direction of acorresponding one of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 or adirection parallel thereto. The height of each of the first to sixthcoil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 may be the length thereof in the opticalaxis direction.

The length L1 of the first magnet 3130-1 may be less than the length M1or X1 of the first coil unit 3230-1 (L1<M1, X1). In another embodiment,X1≤L1≤M1.

The length W1 of the first magnet 3130-1 in the width direction may beless than the length K1 of the first coil unit 3230-1 in the widthdirection (W1<K1).

In addition, the length of the second magnet 3130-2 may be less than thelength M1 or X2 of the second coil unit 3230-2. The length of the secondmagnet 3130-2 in the width direction may be less than the length of thesecond coil unit 3230-2 in the width direction.

The length L2 of the third magnet 3130-3 may be less than the length M2or Y1 of the third coil unit 3230-3 (L2<M2, Y1). In another embodiment,Y1 L2 M2.

The length W2 of the third magnet 3130-3 in the width direction may beless than the length K2 of the third coil unit 3230-3 in the widthdirection (W2<K2). In another embodiment, W2 and K2 may be equal to eachother.

The length M2 of the third coil unit 3230-3 in the longitudinaldirection may be greater than the length M1 of the first coil unit3230-1 in the longitudinal direction and the length of the second coilunit 3230-2 in the longitudinal direction (M2≥M1). In addition, thelength M2 of the sixth coil unit 3230-6 in the longitudinal directionmay be greater than the length of the fourth coil unit 3230-4 in thelongitudinal direction and the length of the fifth coil unit 3230-5 inthe longitudinal direction.

For example, the length M2 of the third coil unit 3230-3 in thefirst-axis direction may be greater than the length M1 of the first coilunit 3230-1 in the second-axis direction and the length of the secondcoil unit 3230-2 in the second-axis direction.

In addition, for example, the length of the sixth coil unit 3230-6 inthe first-axis direction may be greater than the length of the fourthcoil unit 3230-4 in the second-axis direction and the length of thefifth coil unit 3230-5 in the second-axis direction.

The first-axis direction may be a direction from the first surface 3031a to the second surface 3031 b of the circuit member 3231 or a directionopposite thereto. The second-axis direction may be a directionperpendicular to the first-axis direction. For example, the second-axisdirection may be a direction from the third surface 3031 c to the fourthsurface 3031 d of the circuit member 3231 or a direction oppositethereto.

In addition, the length Y1 of the third coil unit 3230-3 may be greaterthan the length X1 of the first coil unit 3230-1 and/or the length X2 ofthe second coil unit 3230-2 (Y1>X1, X2). In addition, the length Y1 ofthe sixth coil unit 3230-6 may be greater than the length X1 of thefourth coil unit 3230-4 and/or the length X2 of the fifth coil unit3230-5 (Y1>X1, X2).

In addition, for example, the length X1 of the first coil unit 3230-1and the length X2 of the second coil unit 3230-2 may be equal to eachother (X1=X2).

The length L2 of the third magnet 3130-3 may be greater than the lengthL1 of the first magnet 3130-1 and/or the length of the second magnet3130-2 (L2>L1). In addition, the length of the sixth magnet 3130-6 maybe greater than the length of the fourth magnet 3130-4 and/or the lengthof the fifth magnet 3130-5.

For example, the length L2 of the third magnet 3130-3 in the first-axisdirection may be greater than the length L1 of the first magnet 3130-1in the second-axis direction and/or the length of the second magnet3130-2 in the second-axis direction (L2>L1). In addition, the length ofthe sixth magnet 3130-6 in the first-axis direction may be greater thanthe length of the fourth magnet 3130-4 in the second-axis directionand/or the length of the fifth magnet 3130-5 in the second-axisdirection.

Since M2>M1 and L2>L1, first electromagnetic force generated by thethird coil unit 3230-3 and the third magnet 3130-3 may be greater thaneach of second electromagnetic force generated by the first coil unit3230-1 and the first magnet 3130-1 and third electromagnetic forcegenerated by the second coil unit 3230-2 and the second magnet 3130-2.In addition, fourth electromagnetic force generated by the sixth coilunit 3230-6 and the sixth magnet 3130-6 may be greater than each offifth electromagnetic force generated by the fourth coil unit 3230-4 andthe fourth magnet 3130-4 and sixth electromagnetic force generated bythe fifth coil unit 3230-5 and the fifth magnet 3130-5.

As a result, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the sum of the first electromagnetic force and the fourthelectromagnetic force in the second-axis (e.g. X-axis) direction and thesum of the second electromagnetic force, the third electromagneticforce, the fifth electromagnetic force, and the sixth electromagneticforce in the first-axis (e.g. Y-axis) direction, thereby improvingreliability in OIS operation.

For example, L1:L2=1:1 to 1:1.5. Alternatively, for example, L1:L2=1:1.2to 1:1.4.

In addition, the length K2 of the third coil unit 3230-3 in the widthdirection may be greater than the length K1 of the first coil unit3230-1 in the width direction and/or the length of the second coil unit3230-2 in the width direction (K2>K1). However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, both may be equal to each other.For example, K2 may be the length of the third coil unit 3230-3 in thesecond-axis direction, and K1 may be the length of each of the firstcoil unit 3230-1 and the second coil unit 3230-2 in the first-axisdirection.

In addition, the length of the sixth coil unit 3230-6 in the widthdirection (or the second-axis direction) may be greater than the lengthof the fourth coil unit 3230-4 in the width direction and/or the lengthof the fifth coil unit 3230-5 in the width direction (or the first-axisdirection). However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, both may be equal to each other.

The length W2 of the third magnet 3130-3 in the width direction may begreater than the length of length W1 of the first magnet 3130-1 in thewidth direction and/or the length of the second magnet 3130-2 in thewidth direction (W2>W1). However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.In another embodiment, W2=W1.

For example, W2 may be the length of the third magnet 3130-3 in thesecond-axis direction, and W1 may be the length of each of the first andsecond magnets 3130-1 and 3130-2 in the first-axis direction.

The length of the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the width direction (or thesecond-axis direction) may be greater than the length of the fourthmagnet 3130-4 in the width direction (or the first-axis direction)and/or the length of the fifth magnet 3130-5 in the width direction (orthe first-axis direction). However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, both may be equal to each other.

Since W2>W1, the embodiment is capable of reducing the differencebetween the sum of the first electromagnetic force and the fourthelectromagnetic force in the second-axis (e.g. X-axis) direction and thesum of the second electromagnetic force, the third electromagneticforce, the fifth electromagnetic force, and the sixth electromagneticforce in the first-axis (e.g. Y-axis) direction, thereby improvingreliability in OIS operation.

The height H2 of the third magnet 3130-3 may be equal to the height H1of the first magnet 3130-1 and/or the height of the second magnet 3130-2(H2=H1). Here, H1 and H2 may be the lengths of the magnets 3130-1 to3130-3 in the optical-axis direction or a third-axis direction (e.g. theZ-axis direction or the optical-axis direction). Here, the third-axisdirection may be a direction perpendicular to the first-axis directionand the second-axis direction.

Alternatively, H1 may be the distance from the lower surface to theupper surface of the first magnet 3130-1 (or the second magnet 3130-2),and H2 may be the distance from the lower surface to the upper surfaceof the third magnet 3130-3.

In addition, the height of the sixth magnet 3130-6 may be equal to theheight of the fourth magnet 3130-4 and/or the height of the fifth magnet3130-5.

In addition, for example, the lengths of the first to sixth magnets3130-1 to 3130-6 in the optical-axis direction may be equal to eachother.

Referring to FIG. 36, each of the first to sixth coil units 3230-1 to3230-6 may be formed in a ring shape having a hole open in theoptical-axis direction.

In addition, the first distance between the first magnet 3130-1 and thefirst coil unit 3230-1 in the optical-axis direction, the seconddistance between the second magnet 3130-2 and the second coil unit3230-2 in the optical-axis direction, the third distance between thethird magnet 3130-3 and the third coil unit 3230-3 in the optical-axisdirection, the fourth distance between the fourth magnet 3130-4 and thefourth coil unit 3230-4 in the optical-axis direction, the fifthdistance between the fifth magnet 3130-5 and the fifth coil unit 3230-5in the optical-axis direction, and the sixth distance between the sixthmagnet 3130-6 and the sixth coil unit 3230-6 in the optical-axisdirection may be equal to each other. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto.

In another embodiment, the third distance may be less than the firstdistance and/or the second distance, and the sixth distance may be lessthan the fourth distance and/or the fifth distance (CASE1). Whencomparing with the case in which the first to sixth distances are equalto each other (CASE2), the other embodiment (CASE1) is capable offurther reducing the difference between electromagnetic force generatedin the X-axis direction and electromagnetic force generated in theY-axis direction.

A camera module according to an embodiment may include a first magnetunit 3130 a including three magnets 3130-1 to 3130-3 for AF driving of afirst lens module and a second magnet unit 3130 b including threemagnets 3130-4 to 3130-6 for AF driving of a second lens module.

In addition, for OIS driving, the camera module according to theembodiment may include three OIS coil units 3230-1 to 3230-4corresponding to the first to third magnets and three OIS coil units3230-4 to 3230-6 corresponding to the fourth to sixth magnets 3130-4 to3130-6.

Each of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 may be a monopolarmagnetized magnet having a single N pole and a single S pole. Forexample, each of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 may bedisposed such that a first surface thereof opposite the first coil 3120(or the outer surface of the bobbin 3110) has an N pole and a secondsurface thereof opposite the first surface has an S pole. However, thedisclosure is not limited thereto. Each magnet may be disposed so as tohave reverse poles.

The positions of the S poles and the N poles of the first to sixthmagnets 3130-1 to 3130-6 may be set such that electromagnetic force dueto interaction therebetween is generated according to disposition of thefirst and second coils 3120-1 and 3120-2.

In another embodiment, at least one of the first to sixth magnets 3130-1to 3130-6 may be a bipolar magnetized magnet or a 4-pole magnet. Forexample, each of the third and sixth magnets 3130-3 and 3130-6 may be abipolar magnetized magnet, and each of the first, second, fourth, andfifth magnets 3130-1, 3130-2, 3130-4, and 3130-5 may be a monopolarmagnetized magnet.

In the case in which a bipolar magnetized magnet is provided, the magnetmay include a first magnet portion, a second magnet portion, and apartition disposed between the first magnet portion and the secondmagnet portion. Here, the partition may be referred to as a “nonmagneticpartition.” In addition, the partition may be a portion that separatesor isolates the first magnet portion and the second magnet portion fromeach other and that has substantially no magnetism, and may be a portionhaving little polarity. For example, the partition may be a nonmagneticmaterial or air. The partition may be referred to as a “neutral zone.”

For example, the first magnet portion and the second magnet portion maybe spaced apart from each other in the optical-axis (OA1 and OA2)directions. The first magnet portion may include an N pole, an S pole,and a first boundary surface between the N pole and the S pole, and thesecond magnet portion may include an N pole, an S pole, and a secondboundary surface between the N pole and the S pole.

Each of the first boundary surface and the second boundary surface maybe a portion having substantially no magnetism, may include a sectionhaving little polarity, and may be a portion that is naturally generatedin order to form a magnet consisting of an N pole and an S pole.

The partition is a portion that is artificially formed when the firstmagnet portion and the second magnet portion are magnetized. The widthof the partition may be greater than the width of each of the firstboundary surface and the second boundary surface.

For example, the first magnet 3130-1 may be located inside a region ofthe first coil unit 3230-1, and may overlap the first coil unit 3230-1in the optical-axis direction. The second magnet 3130-2 may be locatedinside a region of the second coil unit 3230-2, and may overlap thesecond coil unit 3230-2 in the optical-axis direction. The third magnet3130-3 may be located inside a region of the third coil unit 3230-3, andmay overlap the third coil unit 3230-3 in the optical-axis direction.

In addition, the fourth magnet 3130-4 may be located inside a region ofthe fourth coil unit 3230-4, and may overlap the fourth coil unit 3230-4in the optical-axis direction. The fifth magnet 3130-5 may be locatedinside a region of the fifth coil unit 3230-5, and may overlap the fifthcoil unit 3230-5 in the optical-axis direction. The sixth magnet 3130-6may be located inside a region of the sixth coil unit 3230-6, and mayoverlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6 in the optical-axis direction.

Referring to FIGS. 36 and 38, a first-axis magnet may include the firstmagnet 3130-1, the second magnet 3130-2, the fourth magnet 3130-4, andthe fifth magnet 3130-5.

In addition, a second-axis magnet may include the third magnet 3130-3and the sixth magnet 3130-6.

The OIS mover 5300 may be moved in the first-axis direction due tointeraction between the first-axis magnet and the first-axis coil, andthe OIS mover 5300 may be moved in the second-axis direction due tointeraction between the second-axis magnet and the second-axis coil.

Also, in another embodiment, a description given with reference to FIGS.11 to 16F and a description given with reference to FIGS. 17A to 18B to16F may be applied or analogically applied to the lens moving apparatus3100 according to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 27 to 42.

For example, the size and disposition of the first to third magnets130-1 to 130-3, the size and disposition of the third to firth coilunits 230-1 to 230-3, and the size and disposition relationship betweenthe magnets 130-1 to 130-3 and the coil units 230-1 to 230-3 may beapplied or analogically applied to the first to third magnets 3130-1 to3130-3, the first to third coil units 3230-1 to 3230-3, the fourth tosixth magnets 3130-4 to 3130-6, and the fourth to sixth coil units3230-4 to 3230-6 according to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 27 to 42.

The first sensor 3240 a may overlap the first-axis magnet in thethird-axis direction.

The first sensor 3240 a may overlap one end of the first-axis magnet inthe third-axis direction, and the one end of the first-axis magnet maybe adjacent to a region between the first opening 3023 a and the secondopening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231.

Alternatively, one end of the first-axis magnet may be adjacent to acentral line 3308 of the circuit member 3231. The central line 3308 maybe a straight line that is parallel to the first-axis direction and thatis equidistant from the third side surface 3031 c and the fourth sidesurface 3031 d of the circuit member 3231. Alternatively, the centralline 3308 may be a straight line that bisects the circuit member 3231 inthe first-axis direction.

For example, the first sensor may overlap one end of one of the firstmagnet 3130-1, the second magnet 3130-2, the fourth magnet 3130-4, andthe fifth magnet 3130-5 in the third-axis direction.

For example, referring to FIG. 39A, the first sensor 3240 a may bedisposed under a first end 3029 a of the first magnet 3130-1. Here, thefirst end 3029 a of the first magnet 3130-1 may be located spaced apartfrom the third magnet 3130-3 more than a second end 3029 b of the firstmagnet 3130-1.

In addition, the first end 3029 a of the first magnet 3130-1 may becloser to the region between the first opening 3023 a and the secondopening 3023 b of the circuit member 3231 or the central line 3308 thanthe second end 3029 b of the first magnet 3130-1.

For example, a sensing region 304 a of the first sensor 3240 a mayoverlap the first magnet 3130-1 in the third-axis direction, and may belocated adjacent to the first end 3029 a of the first magnet 3130-1.

As the first sensor 3240 a is disposed spaced apart from the thirdmagnet 3130-3 and the sixth magnet 3130-6, each of which is asecond-axis magnet, effects on the first sensor 3240 a due to magneticfield interference of the second-axis magnet may be reduced, whereby thesensing sensitivity of the first sensor 3240 a may be improved, andtherefore accurate OIS driving may be performed.

The second sensor 3240 b may overlap the second-axis magnet in thethird-axis direction.

For example, the second sensor 3240 b may overlap one of the thirdmagnet 3130-3 and the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction.

For example, at least a portion of the second sensor 3240 b may overlapthe center of one of the third magnet 3130-3 and the sixth magnet 3130-6in the third-axis direction. As the second sensor 3240 b is maximallyspaced apart from the first-axis magnet, the embodiment is capable ofreducing magnetic field interference of the first-axis magnet, improvingsensing sensitivity of the second sensor 3240 b, and performing accurateOIS driving.

In FIGS. 39A and 40A, the entire region of the first sensor 3240 a isshown as overlapping the first-axis magnet in the third-axis direction,and the entire region of the second sensor 3240 b is shown asoverlapping the second-axis magnet in the third-axis direction. However,the disclosure is not limited thereto.

A sensing region 3040 a of the first sensor 3240 a may overlap thefirst-axis magnet in the third-axis direction, and a sensing region 3040b of the second sensor 3240 b may overlap the second-axis magnet in thethird-axis direction. In another embodiment, at least a portion of thefirst sensor 3240 a may not overlap the first-axis magnet in thethird-axis direction, and at least a portion of the second sensor 3240 bmay not overlap the second-axis magnet in the third-axis direction.

Also, in FIG. 39A, the first-axis magnet is shown as being disposedinside the first-axis coil, and the second-axis magnet is shown as beingdisposed inside the second-axis coil. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto.

In another embodiment, the first-axis magnet may include a first portiondisposed outside the first-axis coil, and the first portion of thefirst-axis magnet may not overlap the first-axis coil in the third-axisdirection. In addition, the first sensor may overlap the first portionof the first-axis magnet in the third-axis direction.

The second-axis magnet may include a first portion disposed outside thesecond-axis coil, and the first portion of the second-axis magnet maynot overlap the second-axis coil in the third-axis direction. Inaddition, the second sensor may overlap the first portion of thesecond-axis magnet in the third-axis direction.

FIG. 39B is a plan view of first to sixth coil units and first to sixthmagnets according to another embodiment. Reference numerals of FIG. 39Bidentical to those of FIG. 39A indicate the same components, and adescription given with reference to FIG. 39A may be applied to the samecomponents.

Referring to FIG. 39B, the length M11 of a first coil unit 3230-1′ inthe second-axis direction may be less than the length M1 of each of thesecond coil unit 3230-2, the fourth coil unit 3230-4, and the fifth coilunit 3230-5, each of which is a first-axis coil, in the second-axisdirection (M11<M1).

One end of the first magnet 3130-1 may not overlap the first coil unit3230-1′ in the third-axis direction, and may overlap the first sensor3240 a in the third-axis direction.

In addition, the other end of the first magnet 3130-1 may overlap thefirst coil unit 3230-1′ in the third-axis direction.

In addition, both ends of the second magnet 3130-2 may overlap thesecond coil unit 3230-2 in the third-axis direction. Both ends of thefourth magnet 3130-4 may overlap the fourth coil unit 3230-4 in thethird-axis direction. Both ends of the fifth magnet 3130-5 may overlapthe fifth coil unit 3230-5 in the third-axis direction.

In addition, both ends of the third magnet 3130-3 may overlap the thirdcoil unit 3230-3 in the third-axis direction, and both ends of the sixthmagnet 3130-6 may overlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6 in the third-axisdirection.

The lower surface of the first magnet 3130-1 may have one end that doesnot overlap the first coil unit 3230-1′ in the third-axis direction, andthe first sensor 3240 a may overlap the end of the lower surface of thefirst magnet 3130-1 in the third-axis direction.

For example, when viewed from above, one end of the first magnet 3130-1may be disposed outside the first coil unit 3230-1′, and the other endof the first magnet 3130-1 may be disposed inside both ends of the firstcoil unit 3230-1′.

In addition, the first magnet 3130-1 may include a first region S1 thatoverlaps the first coil unit 3230-1′ in the third-axis direction and asecond region S2 that does not overlap the first coil unit 3230-1′ inthe third-axis direction.

The first sensor 3240 a may overlap the second region S2 of the firstmagnet 3130-1 in the third-axis direction.

For example, the sensing region 3040 a of the first sensor 3240 a mayoverlap the second region S2 of the first magnet 3130-1 in thethird-axis direction. In addition, for example, the sensing region 3040a may be located at the center of the first sensor 3240 a, and thecenter of the first sensor 3240 a may overlap the second region S2 ofthe first magnet 3130-1 in the third-axis direction.

Since the sensing region 3040 a of the first sensor 3240 a is disposedso as to overlap the second region S2 of the first magnet 3130-1, asdescribed above, effects on the first sensor 3240 a due to a magneticfield generated by the first coil unit 3230-1′ may be inhibited, wherebyaccurate OIS feedback driving may be performed.

FIG. 39C is a plan view of first to sixth coil units and first to sixthmagnets according to a further embodiment. Reference numerals of FIG.39C identical to those of FIG. 39B indicate the same components, and adescription given with reference to FIG. 39B may be applied to the samecomponents.

Referring to FIG. 39C, a sixth coil unit 3230-6′ may include a firstcoil portion 3030-1 and a second coil portion 3030-2. Here, the coilportion may be referred to as a “coil ring.”

The first coil portion 3030-1 and the second coil portion 3030-2 may beconnected to each other. For example, the first coil portion 3030-1 andthe second coil portion 3030-2 may be connected to each other in series,and a single driving signal may be provided thereto.

For example, the sixth coil unit 3230-6′ may further include aconnection wire configured to interconnect the first coil portion 3030-1and the second coil portion 3030-2. For example, the connection wire maybe a single line. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

The first coil portion 3030-1 and the second coil portion 3030-2 mayeach have a ring shape, and may be spaced apart from each other. Forexample, the first coil portion 3030-1 and the second coil portion3030-2 may be arranged in the first-axis direction.

The length M21 of the first coil portion 3030-1 in the first-axisdirection may be less than the length M2 of the third coil unit 3230-3in the first-axis direction (M21<M2). In addition, the length M22 of thesecond coil portion 3030-2 in the first-axis direction may be less thanthe length M2 of the third coil unit 3230-3 in the first-axis direction(M22<M2).

In addition, the length M21 or M22 of each of the first coil portion3030-1 and the second coil portion 3030-2 in the first-axis directionmay be less than the length M11 of the first coil unit 3230-1′ in thesecond-axis direction (M21<M11, M22<M11). In another embodiment, M21=M11and M22=M11.

In addition, the length M21 or M22 of each of the first coil portion3030-1 and the second coil portion 3030-2 in the first-axis directionmay be less than the length M1 of each of the second coil unit 3230-2,the fourth coil unit 3230-4, and the fifth coil unit 3230-5 in thesecond-axis direction (M21<M1, M22<M1).

A central region of the sixth magnet 3130-6, located between one end andthe other end of the sixth magnet 3130-6, may not overlap the sixth coilunit 3230-6′ in the third-axis direction. The central region of thesixth magnet 3130-6 may overlap the second sensor 3240 b (or the sensingregion 3040 b) in the third-axis direction.

In addition, for example, both ends of the sixth magnet 3130-6 mayoverlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6′.

For example, the sixth magnet 3130-6 may include first regions S11 andS12 that overlap the first and second coil portions 3030-1 and 3030-2 inthe third-axis direction and a second region S13 that does not overlapthe first and second coil portions 3030-1 and 3030-2 in the third-axisdirection.

The second sensor 3240 a may overlap the second region S13 of the sixthmagnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction. For example, the sensingregion 3040 b of the second sensor 3240 b may overlap the second regionS13 of the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction. As a result,effects on the second sensor 3240 b due to a magnetic field generated bythe sixth coil unit 3230-6′ may be inhibited, whereby accurate OISfeedback driving may be performed.

The second region S13 of the sixth magnet 3130-6 may overlap a region(or a space) between the first coil portion 3030-1 and the second coilportion 3030-2 in the third-axis direction.

In another embodiment, the second sensor 3240 a may be disposed underthe third magnet 3130-3 so as to overlap the third magnet 3130-3 in thethird-axis direction. At this time, the third coil unit may beconfigured to include the first and second coil portions 3030-1 and3030-2 of FIG. 39C, and a description of FIG. 19C may be applied.

In FIGS. 39B and 39C, the case in which the first sensor 3240 a overlapsthe first magnet 3130-1 was described. However, the disclosure is notlimited thereto. In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40A, the firstsensor 3240 a may be disposed at one of first to third positionsPosition1 to Position3, a coil unit (e.g. 3230-2, 3230-4, or 3230-5)corresponding to each position Position1, Position2, or Position3 may beconfigured like the first coil unit 3230-1 of FIG. 39B, and adescription of FIG. 39B may be applied.

Also, in FIGS. 39B and 39C, the first sensor 3240 a partially overlapsthe first region S1 of the first coil unit 3230-1′ in the third-axisdirection. However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. In anotherembodiment, the first sensor 3240 a may not overlap the first coil unitin the third-axis direction. In a further embodiment, the first sensor3240 a may include a portion (or one end) that does not overlap thefirst magnet 3130-1 in the third-axis direction.

FIG. 40A shows the disposition position of a first sensor 3240 a and thedisposition position of a second sensor 3240 b according to anotherembodiment.

Referring to FIG. 40A, the first sensor 3240 a may be disposed at afirst position Position1 at which the first sensor overlaps a first endof the second magnet 3130-2 in the third-axis direction. Here, the firstend of the second magnet 3130-2 may be adjacent to a first end of thefifth magnet 3130-5.

Alternatively, the first sensor 3240 a may be disposed at a secondposition Position2 at which the first sensor overlaps a first end of thefourth magnet 3130-4 in the third-axis direction. Here, the first end ofthe fourth magnet 3130-4 may be adjacent to a first end of the firstmagnet 3130-1.

Alternatively, the first sensor 3240 a may be disposed at a thirdposition Position3 at which the first sensor overlaps a first end of thefifth magnet 3130-5 in the third-axis direction.

When the first sensor 3240 a is disposed at one of the first to thirdpositions Position1 to Position 3, as described above, a description ofthe first coil unit 3230-1′ and the first magnet 3130-1 of FIG. 38B maybe applied.

The second sensor 3240 b may be disposed at a second position Position2at which the second sensor overlaps a first end or a second end of oneof the third and sixth magnets 3130-3 and 3130-6 in the third-axisdirection (Position4, Position5, Position6, or Position1).

Alternatively, the second sensor 3240 b may be disposed at a secondposition Position2 at which the second sensor overlaps a first innerregion or a second inner region of the third magnet 3130-3 in thethird-axis direction (Position8 or Position9).

The first inner region of the third magnet 3130-3 may be a regionlocated between the first end of the third magnet 3130-3 and a centralregion of the third magnet 3130-3. The second inner region of the thirdmagnet 3130-3 may be a region located between the second end of thethird magnet 3130-3 and the central region of the third magnet 3130-3.

Alternatively, the second sensor 3240 b may be disposed at a secondposition Position2 at which the second sensor overlaps a first innerregion or a second inner region of the sixth magnet 3130-6 in thethird-axis direction (Position10 or Position11). The first inner regionof the sixth magnet 3130-6 may be a region located between the first endof the sixth magnet 3130-6 and a central region of the sixth magnet3130-6. The second inner region of the sixth magnet 3130-6 may be aregion located between the second end of the sixth magnet 3130-6 and thecentral region of the sixth magnet 3130-6.

In FIG. 36, the first to sixth coil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 may be formedat the circuit member 3231, rather than the circuit board 3250. However,the disclosure is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, each ofthe first to sixth coil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 may not be formed at thecircuit member 3231 but may be configured in the form of a ring-shapedcoil block.

FIG. 40B shows the disposition of a first sensor and a second sensoraccording to a further embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 40B, the lens moving apparatus 3100 may furtherinclude a separate seventh magnet 3130-7 for the second sensor 3240 b.

The seventh magnet 3130-7 may be disposed at the housing 3140. Theseventh magnet 3130-7 may be disposed between the first bobbin 3110 aand the second bobbin 3110 b.

The seventh magnet 3130-7 may be disposed at a region of the housing3140 located between the first bobbin 3110 a and the second bobbin 3110b.

For example, the seventh magnet 3130-7 may be disposed at the fourthside portion 3014 d of the first receiving unit 3011 a or the eighthside portion 3015 d of the first receiving unit 3011 b of the housing3140.

The seventh magnet 3130-7 may not be a driving magnet configured togenerate AF driving force through interaction with the first coil 3120 aor the second coil 3120 b, and may serve to provide a magnetic field tothe second sensor 3240 b in order to sense movement of the housing 3140in the second-axis direction. That is, it is sufficient for the seventhmagnet 3130-7 to provide a magnetic field that the second sensor 3240 bcan sense.

For example, the length L3 of the seventh magnet 3130-7 in thefirst-axis direction may be less than the length M1 of the first-axismagnet 3130-1, 3130-2, 3130-4, or 3130-5 in the second-axis directionand the length L2 of the second-axis magnet 3130-3 or 3130-6 in thefirst-axis direction (L3<M1, L2).

In addition, for example, the length W3 of the seventh magnet 3130-7 inthe second-axis direction may be less than the length W1 of thefirst-axis magnet 3130-1, 3130-2, 3130-4, or 3130-5 in the first-axisdirection and the length W2 of the second-axis magnet 3130-3 or 3130-6in the second-axis direction (W3<W1, W2).

In addition, for example, the length W3 of the seventh magnet 3130-7 inthe second-axis direction may be less than or equal to the length of thefirst-axis magnet 3130-1, 3130-2, 3130-4, or 3130-5 in the third-axisdirection and the length W2 of the second-axis magnet 3130-3 or 3130-6in the third-axis direction.

In the case in which the size of the seventh magnet 3130-7 is increased,effects on AF driving of a first lens unit or AF driving of a secondlens unit due to a magnetic field of the seventh magnet 3130-7 may beincreased, whereby AF driving may malfunction. In the embodiment,however, the size of the seventh magnet 3130-7 is formed so as to beless than the size of each of the first-axis magnet and the second-axismagnet, effects of the magnetic field of the seventh magnet 3130-7 maybe reduced, whereby malfunction of AF driving may be inhibited.

For example, the seventh magnet 3130-7 may overlap at least one of thethird magnet 3130-3 and the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the second-axisdirection.

In addition, the seventh magnet 3130-7 may not overlap the first-axismagnet 3130-1, 3130-2, 3130-4, or 3130-5 in the first-axis direction.

In addition, the seventh magnet 3130-7 may not overlap the third coil3230 in the third-axis direction. For example, the seventh magnet 3130-7may not overlap the first to sixth coil units 3230-1 to 3230-6 in thethird-axis direction.

For example, in order to minimize magnetic field interference with thefirst-axis magnet and the second-axis magnet, the seventh magnet 3130-7may be disposed so as to be located at the center of the fourth sideportion 3014 d or the eighth side portion 3015 d of the housing 3140.However, the disclosure is not limited thereto.

In addition, the distance between the first magnet 3130-1 (or the fourthmagnet 3130-4) and the seventh magnet 3130-7 may be equal to thedistance between the second magnet 3130-2 (or the fifth magnet 3130-5)and the seventh magnet 3130-7. However, the disclosure is not limitedthereto. In another embodiment, both may be different from each other.

In addition, the distance between the third magnet 3130-3 and theseventh magnet 3130-7 may be equal to the distance between the sixthmagnet 3130-6 and the seventh magnet 3130-7. However, the disclosure isnot limited thereto. In another embodiment, both may be different fromeach other.

The second sensor 3240 b may be disposed under the seventh magnet3130-7.

The second sensor 3240 b may overlap the seventh magnet 3130-7 in thethird-axis direction. For example, the sensing region 3040 b of thesecond sensor 3240 b may overlap the seventh magnet 3130-7 in thethird-axis direction.

The sensor coupling portion 3433 b configured to receive the secondsensor 3240 b of FIG. 40B may be formed between the first opening 3431 aand the second opening 3431 b of the base 3210. In order to avoidspatial interference with the second sensor 3240 b, the projectingportion 3025 a of the base 3210 may be formed spaced apart from thesensor coupling portion 3433 b.

The embodiment in which the first sensor is disposed at one of the firstto third positions Position1 to Position3 of FIG. 40A may be applied tothe disposition of the first sensor 3240 a of FIG. 40B. In addition, adescription of the first coil unit 3230-1′ and the first magnet 3130-1of FIG. 39B may be applied to the embodiment of FIG. 40B.

FIG. 40C shows a second sensor 3240 b and a sixth coil unit 3230-6 adisposed at the seventh position Position7 of FIG. 40B.

Referring to FIG. 40C, the length M23 of the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a inthe first-axis direction may be less than the length M2 of the thirdcoil unit 3230-3 (M23<M2). For example, the length M23 of the sixth coilunit 3230-6 a may be greater than the length M11 of the first coil unit3230-1′ (M23>M11). In addition, the length M23 of the sixth coil unit3230-6 a may be greater than or equal to the length M1 of each of thesecond coil unit 3230-2, the fourth coil unit 3230-4, and the fifth coilunit 3230-5 (M23 M1). However, the disclosure is not limited thereto. Inanother embodiment, M23<M1.

One end of the sixth magnet 3130-6 may not overlap the sixth coil unit3230-6 a in the third-axis direction, and may overlap the second sensor3240 b in the third-axis direction. In addition, the other end of thesixth magnet 3130-6 may overlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a in thethird-axis direction.

The lower surface of the sixth magnet 3130-6 may have one end that doesnot overlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a in the third-axis direction,and the second sensor 3240 b may overlap the end of the lower surface ofthe sixth magnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction.

For example, when viewed from above, one end of the sixth magnet 3130-6may be disposed outside the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a, and the other endof the sixth magnet 3130-6 may be disposed inside both ends of the sixthcoil unit 3230-6 a.

In addition, the sixth magnet 3130-6 may include a first region S3 thatoverlaps the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a in the third-axis direction and asecond region S4 that does not overlap the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a inthe third-axis direction.

The second sensor 3240 b may overlap the second region S4 of the sixthmagnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction. For example, the sensingregion 3040 b of the second sensor 3240 b may overlap the second regionS4 of the sixth magnet 3130-6 in the third-axis direction. In addition,for example, the sensing region 3040 b may be located at the center ofthe second sensor 3240 b, and the center of the second sensor 3240 b maybe overlap the second region S4 of the sixth magnet 3130-6 in thethird-axis direction. As a result, effects on the second sensor 3240 bdue to a magnetic field generated by the sixth coil unit 3230-6 a may beinhibited, whereby accurate OIS feedback driving may be performed.

A description of FIG. 40C may be applied to or quoted in an embodimentin which the second sensor 3240 b is disposed at the fourth positionPosition4, the fifth position Position5, or the sixth positionPosition6.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of a stator 5400 a according to anotherembodiment.

Referring to FIG. 41, the stator 5400 a includes a circuit member 3250-1and a base 3210.

In the stator 5400 of FIG. 31A, the circuit member 3231 and the circuitboard 3250 are separately provided. However, the circuit member 3250-1of the stator 5400 a of FIG. 41 may be realized by integrally formingthe circuit member 3231 and the circuit board 3250 of FIG. 31A.

That is, the circuit member 3250-1 may include a board portion 3421 a, athird coil including first to sixth coil units 3130-1 a to 3130-6 a, andterminal portions 3253-1 and 3253-2 at which terminals 3251 a areformed.

The board portion 3421 a may include a first opening 3023 a 1 and asecond opening 3023 b 1 corresponding to the first bobbin 3110 a.

The first to sixth coil units 3130-1 a to 3130-6 a may be formed at theboard portion 3421 a 1, and a description of the first to sixth coilunits 3130-1 to 3130-6 of FIGS. 31A and 36 to 40B may be appliedthereto.

The board portion 3431 a may be provided at each corner thereof with ahole 3231 a 1, through which the supporting member 3600 extends. Theboard portion 3431 a may have a through hole 3025 c 1 for coupling withthe protrusion of the base 3210. A description of the hole 3231 a andthe through hole 3025 c of FIG. 31C may be applied to the hole 3231 a 1and the through hole 3025 c 1 of FIG. 41.

The terminal portions 3253-1 and 3253-2 may be disposed at at least oneof two opposite sides (or side surfaces) of the circuit member 3250-1.

For example, the circuit member 3250-1 may include a first terminalportion 3253-1 disposed at one of two opposite long sides (or long sidesurfaces) of the circuit member 3250-1 and a second terminal portion3253-2 disposed at the other of the two opposite long sides (or longside surfaces).

The terminal portions 3253-1 and 3253-2 may be formed as the result of aportion of the circuit member 3250-1 being bent. For example, thecircuit member 3250-1 may include portions bent downwards from the uppersurface of the circuit member 3250-1, and the bent portions may form theterminal portions of the circuit member 3250-1.

A description of the terminal portions of the circuit board 3250 of FIG.31A may be applied to the terminal portions 3253-1 and 3253-2 of thecircuit member 3250-1.

A plurality of terminals 3251 a may be formed at the terminal portions3253-1 and 3253-2 of the circuit member 3250-1. A description of theterminals 3251 of the circuit board 3250 may be applied to the terminals3251 a of the circuit member 3250-1.

The supporting member 3600 may be connected to the circuit member3250-1. For example, each of the supporting members 3601 to 3604 may besoldered to the lower surface of the circuit member 3250-1 through acorresponding one of the holes 3231 a 1 formed in the corners of thecircuit member 3250-1.

The supporting members 3601 to 3604 may be connected to four AF coilterminals, among the plurality of terminals of the circuit member3250-1.

The first to sixth coil units 3130-1 a to 3130-6 a may be connected toOIS terminals, among the plurality of terminals.

For example, the first coil unit 3230-1 a, the second coil unit 3230-2a, the fourth coil unit 3230-4 a, and the fifth coil unit 3230-5 a, eachof which is a first-axis coil, may be connected to each other in series.Both ends of the first-axis coil may be connected to two OIS terminals,among the plurality of terminals of the circuit member 3250-1.

For example, the third coil unit 3230-3 a and the sixth coil unit 3230-6a, each of which is a second-axis coil, may be connected to each otherin series. Both ends of the second-axis coil may be connected to twoother OIS terminals, among the plurality of terminals of the circuitmember 3250-1.

The circuit member 3250-1 may include a first circuit pattern or a firstwire configured to interconnect both ends of the first-axis coil and thetwo OIS terminals, and may include a second circuit pattern or a secondwire configured to interconnect both ends of the second-axis coil andthe other two OIS terminals.

Since the circuit member 3231 and the circuit board 3250 of FIG. 31A areintegrated in the embodiment of FIG. 41, the number of parts may bereduced and the height of the lens moving apparatus may be reduced,whereby miniaturization may be achieved. In addition, malfunction due topoor contact between the circuit member 3231 and the circuit board 3250may be prevented.

The lens moving apparatus 3100 according to the above embodiment may berealized as a camera module or an optical instrument or may be used invarious fields, such as those of a camera module or an opticalinstrument.

For example, the lens moving apparatus 2100 according to the embodimentmay be included in an optical instrument configured to form an image ofan object in a space using reflection, refraction, absorption,interference, diffraction, etc., which are characteristics of light, toincrease the visual power of the eyes, to record or reproduce an imageformed by a lens, to perform optical measurement, or to propagate ortransfer an image. For example, an optical instrument according to anembodiment may include a smartphone or a portable terminal equipped witha camera.

FIG. 42 is a perspective view of a camera module 5000 according toanother embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 42, the camera module 5000 may include a lens movingapparatus 3100, a first lens module 3400 a mounted to a first bobbin3110 a, a second lens module 3400 b mounted to a second bobbin 3110 b, acircuit board 5010, an infrared filter (not shown), an image sensor (notshown), and a controller (not shown). However, at least one of thecircuit board 5010, the infrared filter (not shown), the image sensor(not shown), and the controller (not shown) may be omitted from thecamera module 5000 or may be changed. The lens moving apparatus 3100 maybe the lens moving apparatus according to the embodiment describedabove.

Each of the first and second lens modules 3400 a and 3400 b may includeat least one lens. Alternatively, each of the first and second lensmodules 3400 a and 3400 b may include a lens and a lens barrelconfigured to receive the lens therein. However, one component of thelens module is not limited to the lens barrel, and any holder structurecapable of supporting one or more lenses may be used.

The lens modules 3400 a and 3400 b may be coupled to the bobbins 3110 aand 3110 b using an adhesive (not shown). In an example, the lensmodules 3400 a and 3400 b may be screw-engaged with the bobbins 3110 aand 3110 b. Meanwhile, light passing through the first and second lensmodules 3400 a and 3400 b may be irradiated on the image sensor.

The infrared filter may prevent infrared light from being incident onthe image sensor. The infrared filter may be disposed between the lensmodules 3400 a and 3400 b and the image sensor.

In an example, the infrared filter may be disposed at a holder memberprovided separately from a base 3210 of the lens moving apparatus 3100.In another example, the infrared filter may be mounted in through holes3431 a and 3431 b of the base 3210.

The infrared filter may include a first infrared filter and a secondinfrared filter.

The first infrared filter may be mounted in the first through hole 3431a of the base 3120, and may block an infrared component of the lightpassing through the first lens module 3400 a. The second infrared filtermay be mounted in the second through hole 3431 b of the base 3120, andmay block an infrared component of the light passing through the secondlens module 3400 b.

The infrared filter may be made of a film material or a glass material.The infrared filter may be formed by coating a flat optical filter, suchas a cover glass for imaging surface protection, with an anti-infraredcoating material. In an example, the infrared filter may be an infraredabsorption filter configured to absorb infrared light. In anotherexample, the infrared filter may be an infrared reflection filterconfigured to reflect infrared light.

The base 3210 of the lens moving apparatus 3100 may be disposed at theupper surface of the circuit board 5010. The camera module 5000 mayfurther include a separate holder member (not shown) disposed betweenthe circuit board 5010 and the base 3210.

The circuit board 5010 may supply electric power or a driving signal(driving current) to a first coil 3120 a, a second coil 3120 b, and athird coil 3230.

The image sensor may be disposed at the circuit board 5010, may beconnected to the circuit board 5010, and may convert light irradiated onan effective image region of the image sensor into an electrical signal.

In an example, the image sensor may be coupled to the circuit board 5010by surface mounting technology (SMT). In another example, the imagesensor may be coupled to the circuit board 5010 by flip chip technology.

The image sensor may include a first image sensor configured to convertlight passing through the first lens module 3400 a and the firstinfrared filter into an electrical signal and a second image sensorconfigured to convert light passing through the second lens module 3400b and the second infrared filter into an electrical signal. The firstimage sensor may be disposed so as to be aligned in optical axis withthe first lens module 3400 a, and the second image sensor may bedisposed so as to be aligned in optical axis with the second lens module3400 b.

The controller may be disposed at the circuit board 5010. In anotherexample, the controller may be disposed at an external component otherthan the circuit board 5010.

The controller may individually control the direction, intensity, andamplitude of current that is supplied to the first to third coils 3120a, 3120 b, and 3230.

The controller may control current that is supplied to the first tothird coils 3120 a, 3120 b, and 3230 to perform at least one of anautofocus function and a handshake compensation function of the dualcamera module.

In addition, the controller may perform at least one of feedback controlof the autofocus function and feedback control of the handshakecompensation function based on the output of a first sensor and theoutput of a second sensor.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view of a portable terminal 200A according toan embodiment, and FIG. 44 is a view showing the construction of theportable terminal 200A shown in FIG. 43.

Referring to FIGS. 43 and 44, the portable terminal 200A (hereinafterreferred to as a “terminal”) may include a body 850, a wirelesscommunication unit 710, an A/V input unit 720, a sensing unit 740, aninput/output unit 750, a memory unit 760, an interface unit 770, acontroller 780, and a power supply unit 790.

The body 850 shown in FIG. 43 has a bar shape; however, the disclosureis not limited thereto. The body may have any of various structures,such as a slide type structure, a folder type structure, a swing typestructure, and a swivel type structure, in which two or more sub-bodiesare coupled so as to be movable relative to each other.

The body 850 may include a case (casing, housing, cover, etc.) thatdefines the external appearance thereof. For example, the body 850 maybe divided into a front case 851 and a rear case 852. Various electronicparts of the terminal may be mounted in a space defined between thefront case 851 and the rear case 852.

The wireless communication unit 710 may include one or more modules thatenable wireless communication between the terminal 200A and a wirelesscommunication system or between the terminal 200A and a network in whichthe terminal 200A is located. For example, the wireless communicationunit 710 may include a broadcast receiving module 711, a mobilecommunication module 712, a wireless Internet module 713, a nearfieldcommunication module 714, and a location information module 715.

The audio/video (A/V) input unit 720, which is provided to input anaudio signal or a video signal, may include a camera 721 and amicrophone 722.

The camera 721 may include the camera module 200, 1000, or 3100according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19, 20, or 27, and may includethe camera module according to any of the other embodiments describedabove.

The sensing unit 740 may sense the current state of the terminal 200A,such as the opening and closing state of the terminal 200A, the positionof the terminal 200A, whether a user contacts the terminal, theorientation of the terminal 200A, and acceleration/deceleration of theterminal 200A, in order to generate a sensing signal for controlling theoperation of the terminal 200A. For example, in the case in which theterminal 200A is a slide phone, the sensing unit may sense whether theslide phone is open or closed. In addition, the sensing unit senseswhether electric power is supplied from the power supply unit 790 andwhether the interface unit 770 is coupled to an external instrument.

The input/output unit 750 is provided to generate input or outputrelated to visual sensation, audible sensation, or tactile sensation.The input/output unit 750 may generate input data for controlling theoperation of the terminal 200A, and may display information processed bythe terminal 200A.

The input/output unit 750 may include a keypad unit 730, a displaymodule 751, a sound output module 752, and a touchscreen panel 753. Thekeypad unit 730 may generate input data through keypad input.

The display module 751 may include a plurality of pixels, the color ofwhich is changed according to an electrical signal. For example, thedisplay module 751 may include at least one of a liquid crystal display,a thin film transistor-liquid crystal display, an organic light-emittingdiode, a flexible display, and a three-dimensional (3D) display.

The sound output module 752 may output audio data received from thewireless communication unit 710 in a call signal reception mode, atelephone communication mode, a recording mode, a voice recognitionmode, or a broadcast reception mode, or may output audio data stored inthe memory unit 760.

The touchscreen panel 753 may convert a change in capacitance due to auser's touch on a specific region of the touchscreen into an electricalinput signal.

The memory unit 760 may store a program for processing and control ofthe controller 780, and may temporarily store input/output data (forexample, a telephone directory, messages, audio, still images,photographs, and video). For example, the memory unit 760 may storeimages, such as photographs or video, captured by the camera 721.

The interface unit 770 functions as a path for connection between theterminal 200A and an external instrument. The interface unit 770 mayreceive data or electric power from the external instrument and transmitthe received data or electric power to internal components of theterminal 200A, or may transfer data in the terminal 200A to the externalinstrument. For example, the interface unit 770 may include awired/wireless headset port, an external charger port, a wired/wirelessdata port, a memory card port, a port for connection with an apparatushaving an identification module, an audio input/output (I/O) port, avideo input/output (I/O) port, and an earphone port.

The controller 780 may control the overall operation of the terminal200A. For example, the controller 780 may perform related control andprocessing for voice communication, data communication, and videocommunication.

The controller 780 may have a multimedia module 781 for multimediareproduction. The multimedia module 781 may be realized in thecontroller 780 or may be realized separately from the controller 780.

The controller 780 may perform pattern recognition processing that iscapable of recognizing writing input or drawing input performed on thetouchscreen as text or an image, respectively.

The power supply unit 790 may receive external power and internal powerand supply required power to respective components under control of thecontroller 780.

The features, structures, and effects described in the above embodimentsare included in at least one embodiment, but are not limited only to oneembodiment. Furthermore, features, structures, and effects illustratedin each embodiment may be combined or modified in other embodiments bythose skilled in the art to which the embodiments pertain. Therefore, itis to be understood that such combinations and modifications fall withinthe scope of the present disclosure.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

Embodiments may be used in a lens moving apparatus capable of reducingmagnetic field interference between magnets, maintaining balance betweenelectromagnetic force in an X-axis direction and electromagnetic forcein a Y-axis direction necessary to perform an OIS function, and reducingthe weight of an OIS moving unit to reduce current consumption, and acamera module and an optical instrument including the same.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A lens moving apparatus comprising: aboard; a housing comprising a first side portion and a second sideportion opposite each other and a third side portion and a fourth sideportion opposite each other; a bobbin disposed in the housing; a firstcoil disposed at the bobbin; and a magnet disposed at the housing,wherein the board comprises a second coil opposite the magnet, themagnet comprises a first magnet disposed at the first side portion ofthe housing, a second magnet disposed at the second side portion of thehousing, and a third magnet disposed at the third side portion of thehousing, the second coil comprises a first coil unit opposite the firstmagnet, a second coil unit opposite the second magnet, and a third coilunit opposite the third magnet, each of the first to third coil unitscomprises a line having a plurality of turns, and a width of the line ofthe third coil unit is less than a width of the line of the first coilunit.
 2. The lens moving apparatus according to claim 1, wherein anumber of turns of the line of the third coil unit is greater than anumber of turns of the line of the first coil unit.
 3. The lens movingapparatus according to claim 1, wherein a width of the third coil unitis equal to a width of the first coil unit.
 4. The lens moving apparatusaccording to claim 1, wherein a width of the third coil unit is greaterthan a width of the first coil unit.
 5. The lens moving apparatusaccording to claim 1, wherein each of the first to third coil unitscomprises a spiral pattern or an oval pattern.
 6. The lens movingapparatus according to claim 1, wherein each of the first to third coilunits comprises a first layer and a second layer disposed on the firstlayer, and a width of the line of each of the first layer and the secondlayer of the third coil unit is less than a width of the line of each ofthe first layer and the second layer of the first coil unit.
 7. The lensmoving apparatus according to claim 6, wherein each of the first tothird coil units comprises at least one via configured to interconnectthe first layer and the second layer.
 8. The lens moving apparatusaccording to claim 6, wherein the first coil unit comprises a pluralityof first lines arranged in the first region in a direction from thefirst side to the second side, the second coil unit comprises aplurality of second lines arranged in the second region in the directionfrom the first side to the second side, and the third coil unitcomprises a plurality of third lines arranged in the third region in adirection from the third side to the fourth side.
 9. The lens movingapparatus according to claim 8, wherein a width of each of the firstlines is greater than a distance between the first lines, a width ofeach of the second lines is greater than a distance between the secondlines, and a width of each of the third lines is greater than a distancebetween the second lines.
 10. The lens moving apparatus according toclaim 6, wherein a first length of each of the first and second coilunits is equal to a second length of the third coil unit, and whereinthe first length is a distance between opposite outermost ends of eachof the first and second coil units, and the second length is a distancebetween the outermost ends of the third coil unit.
 11. The lens movingapparatus according to claim 1, wherein the width of the line of thefirst coil unit and a width of the line of the second coil unit areequal to each other.
 12. The lens moving apparatus according to claim11, wherein a thickness of the first coil unit and a thickness of thesecond coil unit are equal to each other.
 13. The lens moving apparatusaccording to claim 1, wherein the second coil comprises a first side anda second side opposite each other and a third side and a fourth sideopposite each other, the board comprises an opening, and the boardcomprises a first region located between the first side and the opening,the first coil unit being disposed in the first region, a second regionlocated between the second side and the opening, the second coil unitbeing disposed in the second region, and a third region located betweenthe third side and the opening, the third coil unit being disposed inthe third region.
 14. The lens moving apparatus according to claim 1,wherein thicknesses of the first to third coil units is equal to eachother.
 15. The lens moving apparatus according to claim 14, wherein awidth of the line of each of the first to third coil units is less thanthe thickness of each of the first to third coil units.
 16. The lensmoving apparatus according to claim 1, wherein each of a ratio of thewidth of the line of the third coil unit to the width of the line of thefirst coil unit and a ratio of the width of the line of the third coilunit to the width of the line of the second coil unit is 1:1.25 to1:1.5.
 17. The lens moving apparatus according to claim 1, comprising adummy member disposed at the fourth side portion of the housing.
 18. Acamera module comprising: a lens; the lens moving apparatus according toclaim 1; and an image sensor.